City of Brentwood Fire House ADA Upgrades

Bid Document For

City of Brentwood

Fire House ADA Upgrades September 27, 2019

In

Brentwood, Missouri

2348 South Brentwood Blvd. – Brentwood, Missouri 63144 (314) 962-4800

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Brentwood Fire House September 27th, 2019 ADA Upgrades

PROJECT TITLE PAGE Page - 1

SECTION 000101 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE

1.1 PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1

A. City of Brentwood Fire House ADA Upgrades

B. City of Brentwood, Missouri

C. 8756 Eulalie Ave, Brentwood, MO 63144

D. Engineer Project No. 1916500

E. Horner & Shifrin, Inc.

F. 401 South 18th Street, Suite 400

G. St. Louis, MO 63103

H. Phone: 314-531-4321

I. Web Site: www.hornershifrin.com

J. Issued: October 1, 2019

END OF SECTION 000101


PROJECT TITLE PAGE Page - 2



PROJECT SEALS PAGE Page - 1

SECTION 000107 - SEALS PAGE

1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD A. Architect:

1. R. Gregory Garner 2. A-005443

B. HVAC & Plumbing Engineer:

1. Dave Lauver 2. PE-2007002812

C. Electrical Engineer: 1. Keith Smith 2. PE-2000154305



PROJECT SEALS PAGE Page - 2



TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - 1

SECTION 000115 – TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS

A. List of Drawings: Drawings consist of the following Contract Drawings and other drawings of type indicated. 1. G001 – C OVER SHEET

2. A001 – TYPICAL NOTES, SYMBOLS, & DIM RULES

3. A002 – TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHT

4. A101 – PARTIAL BASEMENT LEVEL – DEMOLITION PLAN

5. A102 – PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR LEVEL – DEMOLITION PLAN

6. A103 – SECOND FLOOR LEVEL – DEMOLITION PLAN

7. A111 – PARTIAL BASEMENT LEVEL – RENOVATION PLAN

8. A112 – PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR LEVEL – RENOVATION PLAN

9. A113 – SECOND FLOOR LEVEL – RENOVATION PLAN

10. A121 – PARTIAL BASEMENT REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

11. A401 – ENLARGED PLANS

12. A402 – INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

13. MP001 – SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

14. MP101 – BASEMENT / FIRST FLOOR PLANS

15. MP102 – SECOND LEVEL PLANS

16. E101 – LEGEND & BASEMENT PLANS

17. E102 – SECOND LEVEL PLANS

1.2 LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

A. Bidding and Contract Requirements: Specifications consist of the following Contract Specifications: 1. 000101 – Project Title Page 2. 000107 – Seals Page 3. 000115 – Table of Contents 4. 002513 – Prebid Meetings 5. 004393 – Bid Submittal Checklist 6. City of Brentwood Bid Contract 7. City of Brentwood Bid Document 8. City of Brentwood General Conditions

B. General Requirements: Specifications consist of the following Contract Specifications:

1. 011000 – Summary 2. 012500 – Substitution Procedures 3. 012600 – Contract Modification Procedures 4. 012900 – Payment Procedures 5. 013300 – Submittal Procedures 6. 014000 – Quality Requirements 7. 015000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls 8. 016000 – Product Requirements 9. 017300 – Execution 10. 017700 – Closeout Procedures 11. 017823 – Operation and Maintenance Data 12. 017839 – Project Record Documents 13. 017900 – Demonstration and Training


TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - 2

C. Technical Requirements 1. 220500 – Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods 2. 220600 – Plumbing Hangers and Pipe Supports 3. 220840 – Plumbing Pipe Insulations 4. 221100 – Plumbing Valves 5. 224100 – Piping Excavation and Backfilling 6. 224110 – Water Distribution Piping 7. 224200 – Drainage and Vent Piping 8. 224300 – Plumbing Specialties 9. 224400 – Plumbing Fixtures 10. 260500 – Common Work Results for Electrical 11. 260519 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 12. 260526 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 13. 260529 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 14. 260533 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 15. 260553 – Identification for Electrical Systems 16. 262416 – Panelboards 17. 262726 – Wiring Devices 18. 262816 – Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 19. 265100 – Interior Lighting



PREBID MEETINGS Page - 1

SECTION 002513 - PREBID MEETING

1.1 PREBID MEETING

A. Engineer will conduct a Prebid meeting as indicated below:

1. Meeting Date: October 8, 2019 2. Meeting Time: 1:30 PM, local time. 3. Location: Brentwood Fire House, 8756 Eulalie Ave, Brentwood, MO 63144

B. Attendance:

1. Prime Bidders: Attendance at Prebid meeting is recommended. 2. Subcontractors: Attendance at Prebid meeting is recommended.

C. Bidder Questions: Submit written questions to be addressed at Prebid meeting minimum of two business days prior to meeting.

D. Agenda: Prebid meeting agenda will include review of topics that may affect proper preparation and submittal of bids, including the following:

1. Procurement and Contracting Requirements: a. Instructions to Bidders. b. Bidder Qualifications. c. Bonding. d. Insurance. e. Bid Security. f. Bid Form and Attachments. g. Bid Submittal Requirements. h. Bid Submittal Checklist. i. Notice of Award.

2. Communication during Bidding Period:

a. Obtaining documents. b. Bidder's Requests for Information. c. Bidder's Substitution Request/Prior Approval Request. d. Addenda.

3. Contracting Requirements:

a. Agreement. b. The General Conditions. c. The Supplementary Conditions. d. Other Owner requirements.

4. Construction Documents:

a. Scopes of Work. b. Use of Site. c. Work Restrictions. d. Substitutions following award.


PREBID MEETINGS Page - 2

5. Schedule:

a. Project Schedule. b. Contract Time. c. Liquidated Damages. d. Other Bidder Questions.

6. Site/facility visit or walkthrough. 7. Post-Meeting Addendum.

E. Minutes: Engineer is responsible for conducting meeting and will record and distribute meeting minutes to attendees and others known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Procurement and Contracting Documents. Minutes of meeting are issued as Available Information and do not constitute a modification to the Procurement and Contracting Documents. Modifications to the Procurement and Contracting Documents are issued by written Addendum only.

1. Sign-in Sheet: Minutes will include list of meeting attendees. 2. List of Planholders: Minutes will include list of planholders.



BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST Page - 1

SECTION 004393 - BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST

1.1 BID INFORMATION

A. Bidder: ___________________________________________________________.

B. Prime Contract: ____________________________________________________.

C. Project Name: City of Brentwood Fire House ADA Upgrades

D. Project Location: 8756 Eulalie Ave, Brentwood, MO 63144

E. Owner: City of Brentwood, Missouri

F. Engineer: Horner & Shifrin, Inc.

G. Engineer Project Number: 1916500

1.2 BIDDER'S CHECKLIST

A. In an effort to assist the Bidder in properly completing all documentation required, the following checklist is provided for the Bidder's convenience. The Bidder is solely responsible for verifying compliance with bid submittal requirements.

B. Attach this completed checklist to the outside of the Submittal envelope.

1. Used the Bid Form provided in the Project Manual. 2. Prepared the Bid Form as required by the Instructions to Bidders. 3. Indicated on the Bid Form the Addenda received. 4. Attached to the Bid Form: Proposed Schedule of Values Form. 5. Attached to the Bid Form: Bid Bond OR a certified check for the amount required. 6. Bid envelope shows name and address of the Bidder. 7. Bid envelope shows the Bidder's Contractor's License Number. 8. Bid envelope shows name of Project being bid. 9. Bid envelope shows name of Prime Contract being bid, if applicable. 10. Bid envelope shows time and day of Bid Opening. 11. Verified that the Bidder can provide executed Performance Bond and Labor and Material

Bond. 12. Verified that the Bidder can provide Certificates of Insurance in the amounts indicated.



BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST Page - 2


City of Brentwood, Missouri Fire House ADA Upgrades - 2019

City-Contractor Agreement C-1

CITY-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT

This Agreement is made and entered into the ___day of ______, 2019, by and between

the City of Brentwood, Missouri (hereinafter the "City") and _______________, a Corporation

with offices at _____________________________________________, (hereafter the

“Contractor”). The project shall be identified

as City of Brentwood Fire House ADA Upgrades Project.

WITNESSETH:

The Contractor and the City for the consideration set forth herein agree as follows:

ARTICLE I

The Contract Documents

The Contract Documents consist of the General Conditions of City-Contractor

Agreement, Non-Collusion Affidavit, Performance and Payment Bond, Specifications, Drawings,

the Construction Schedule, all Addenda and all Modifications issued after execution of this

Contract, which together with this Agreement form the Contract, and are all as fully made a part

of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. All definitions set forth in

the General Conditions of City-Contractor Agreement are applicable to this Agreement. This

Contract cannot be modified except by duly authorized and executed written amendment.

ARTICLE II

Scope of Work

The Contractor, acting as an independent contractor, shall do everything required by the

Contract Documents. Contractor represents and warrants that contractor has special skills



which qualify contractor to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract and that contractor

is free to perform all such Work and is not a party to any other agreement, written or oral, the

performance of which would prevent or interfere with the performance, in whole or in part, of the

Work.

ARTICLE III

Time of Completion

All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. The Work to be

performed under this Contract shall be completed in accordance with the time limits set forth in

the construction schedule as stated in Article V – Performance of the work. Project substantial

completion must be on or before March 1, 2020. Project closeout must be on or before April 1st,

2020.

ARTICLE IV

The Contract Sum and Payments

Based upon Applications for Payment and an Invoice duly delivered by the Contractor to

the City by the twentieth day of the month for work performed, in accordance with the Contract,

the City shall pay the Contractor for the performance of the Work, the sum of _________ Dollars

($__________) as follows:

(a) On or about the tenth day of each following month, ninety five percent (95%) of the

portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to labor, materials and equipment incorporated

into the Work, and ninety five percent (95%) of the portion of the Contract Sum properly

allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site to be incorporated

into the Work, through the period ending up to the twentieth of the preceding month, less the

aggregate of all previous progress payments;



(b) Within thirty (30) days of substantial completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to

increase the total payments to ninety five percent (95%) of the Contract Sum; and

(c) Final payment within thirty (30) days after the Work is certified by the City as fully

completed and accepted by the City including any required documentation.

(d) The foregoing schedule shall not apply if contrary to federal funding requirements or

unless funds from a state grant are not timely received.

(e) Estimates of work performed and materials delivered shall be finally determined by

the City.

(f) The foregoing retainage amounts are agreed to be required to ensure performance

of the Contract.

(g) Payment shall be deemed made when mailed or personally delivered, whichever is

earlier.

ARTICLE V

Performance of the Work

(a) Within fourteen (14) calendar days after being awarded the Contract, the Contractor

shall prepare and submit for the City's approval (1) a Construction Schedule for the Work in a

bar chart format which Construction Schedule shall indicate the dates for starting and

completing the work.

(b) Completion of the Work in accordance with the time limits set forth in the

Construction Schedule is an essential condition of this Contract. If the Contractor fails to

complete the Work in accordance with the Construction Schedule, unless the delay is excusable



under the provisions of Article VI hereof, the Contractor shall pay the City as liquidated

damages and not as a penalty, the sum of $ 500.00 for each calendar day the Contractor fails to

comply with the Construction Schedule. The total amount so payable to the City as liquidated

damages may be deducted from any sums due or to become due to Contractor from City.

(c) After Commencement of the Work, and until final completion of the Work, the

Contractor shall report to the City as such intervals as the City may reasonably direct, the actual

progress of the work compared to the Construction Schedule. If the Contractor falls behind the

Construction Schedule for any reason, he shall promptly take, and cause his Subcontractors to

take, such action as is necessary to remedy the delay, and shall submit promptly to the City for

approval a supplementary schedule or progress chart demonstrating the manner in which the

delay will be remedied; provided, however, that if the delay is excusable under Article VI hereof,

the Contractor will not be required to take, or cause his Subcontractors to take, any action which

would increase the overall cost of the Work (whether through overtime premium pay or

otherwise), unless the City shall have agreed in writing to reimburse the Contractor for such

increase in cost. Any increase in cost incurred in remedying a delay which is not excusable

under Article VI hereof shall be borne by the Contractor.

ARTICLE VI

Delays Beyond Contractor's Control

(a) If the Contractor fails to complete the Work in accordance with the Construction

Schedule solely as a result of the act or neglect of the City, or by strikes, lockouts, fire or other

similar causes beyond the Contractor's control, the Contractor shall not be required to pay

liquidated damages to the City pursuant to paragraph (b) of Article V hereof, provided the

Contractor uses his best efforts to remedy the delay in the manner specified in paragraph (c) of



Article V hereof. If, as a result of any such cause beyond the Contractor's control, the delay in

completion of the Work in accordance with the Construction Schedule is so great that it cannot

be remedied in the aforesaid manner, or if the backlog of Work is so great that it cannot be

remedied without incurring additional cost which the City does not authorize, then the time of

completion and the Construction Schedule shall be extended pursuant to a Change Order for

the minimum period of delay occasioned by such cause. The period of delay and extension

shall be determined by the City.

(b) Notwithstanding the foregoing paragraph (a), no extension of time or other relief

shall be granted for any delay the cause of which occurs more than seven (7) days before claim

therefore is made in writing by the Contractor to the City, and no extension of time shall be

granted if the Contractor could have avoided the need for such extension by the exercise of

reasonable care and foresight. In the case of a continuing cause of delay, only one claim is

necessary.

(c) Weather shall constitute a cause for granting an extension of time.

(d) In the event a delay is caused by the City, the Contractor's sole remedy shall

consist of his rights under this Article VI.

ARTICLE VII

Changes in the Work

(a) The City may make changes within the general scope of the Contract by altering,

adding to or deducting from the Work, the Contract Sum being adjusted accordingly. All such

changes in the Work shall be executed under the General Conditions of the Contract. No extra

work or change shall be made except pursuant to a Change Order from the City in accordance

with the General Conditions. Any claim for an increase in the Contract Sum resulting from any



such change in the Work shall be made by the Contractor in accordance with the General

Conditions.

(b) If the requested change would result in a delay in the Construction Schedule, the

provisions of paragraph (c) of Article V and of Article VI hereof shall apply. If the requested

change would result in a decrease in the time required to perform the Work, the completion date

and the Construction Schedule shall be adjusted by agreement between the parties to reflect

such decrease.

(c) Any adjustment in the Contract Sum for duly authorized extra work or change in the

Work shall be determined based on the unit prices previously specified; to the extent such unit

prices are applicable. To the extent such unit prices are not applicable, the adjustment in the

Contract Sum shall, at the option of the City, be determined by an acceptable lump sum

properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation, or by an

acceptable cost plus percentage or fixed fee.

ARTICLE VIII

Termination

(a) If the Contractor is adjudged insolvent or bankrupt, or if the Contractor makes a

general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of the

Contractor's insolvency, or if the Contractor fails, except in cases for which extension of time is

provided, to make progress in accordance with the Construction Schedule, or if the Contractor

fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors for material or labor, or persistently disregards

laws, ordinances or the instructions of the City, or otherwise breaches any provision of the

Contract, the City may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy, by giving written notice to

the Contractor, terminate the Contract, take possession of the Work and of all materials and

equipment thereon and finish the Work by whatever method the City may deem expedient. In



such case, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is

finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum shall exceed the expenses of finishing the

Work, including additional architectural, managerial and administrative expenses, such excess

shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expenses shall exceed the unpaid balance of the

Contract Sum, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the City promptly upon demand.

In the event of termination pursuant to this paragraph, the Contractor, upon the request

of the City, shall promptly

(i) assign to the City in the manner and to the extent directed by the City all

right, title and interest of the Contractor under any subcontracts, purchase orders and

construction equipment leases to which the Contractor is a party and which relate to the

Work or to construction equipment required therefore, and

(ii) make available to the City to the extent directed by the City all construction

equipment owned by the Contractor and employed in connection with the Work.

(b) Performance of the Work hereunder may be terminated by the City by giving three

(3) days prior written notice to the Contractor. In the event of termination, under this paragraph

(b) the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the percentage of work not completed on the date of

termination.

ARTICLE IX

Contractor's Insurance

Contractor’s insurance shall be endorsed to cover the contractual liability of the

Contractor under the General Conditions referring to Property Insurance.



ARTICLE X

Indemnities

(a) Liability: Contractor indemnifies, defends, and holds the City harmless for

all third party claims or suits for libel, slander, property damage, and bodily injury, including

death, because of the Contractor’s negligence, general liability or product liability that arise out

of the Project or anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Contractor or anyone for whose

acts the City may be liable, regardless of whether caused in whole or in part by the City’s

negligence. These obligations include all judgments or awards recovered from the claims or

suits, including court costs and attorney fees.

(b) Professional Liability: Contractor indemnifies and holds the City harmless for all

third-party claims or suits for damages, including consequential or economic damages, to the

extent caused by the negligent acts, errors or omissions of the Contractor, its subcontractors,

anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them

may be liable in performing professional services under this Agreement. These obligations

include all judgments or awards recovered from the claims or suits, including court costs and

attorney fees.

(c) Other Indemnities: Contractor indemnifies, defends, and holds the City

harmless for all third-party claims or suits for fines, penalties, liquidated damages or any other

damages of whatsoever nature to the extent caused by the negligence or wrongdoing of the

Contractor, its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone

for whose acts any of them may be liable. These obligations include all judgments or awards

recovered from the claims or suits, including courts costs and attorney fees.



(d) Contractor agrees that its indemnity obligations set forth in this Article will not be

affected in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or

benefits payable by or for the City, the Contractor, or any of the subcontractors under workers’

compensation acts, employer’s liability insurance, or other employee benefit acts.

ARTICLE XI

Insurance

(a) Except to the extent set forth in Section (b) of this Article, the Contractor will

purchase and maintain the cost of workers’ compensation insurance for all employees as well

as the following insurance to cover its operations under this Agreement without limiting the

liability of the Contractor under this Agreement. This insurance will be provided by insurance

companies acceptable to the City and licensed to do business in each jurisdiction where the

Work is performed.

1. Employer’s Liability Insurance in full compliance with the laws of the State of

Missouri together with Employer’s Liability Coverage with minimum limits of liability in the

amount of $1,000,000.00 for each accident and each disease.

2. Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance under Form CA 00 01, covering

all owned hired, and non-owned vehicles, with minimum combined single limits of liability of

$1,000,000 for each accident.

3. Commercial General Liability Insurance, and, if necessary, excess liability

insurance on a “true following-form” basis, all of which is written on an occurrence basis, with

the following minimum limits of liability:



General Aggregate $2,000,000.00

Products/completed operations aggregate $2,000,000.00

Personal and advertising injury $1,000,000.00

Each occurrence $1,000,000.00

Fire damage legal liability $1,000,000.00

Medical expenses $ 500,000.00

4. Excess Liability Insurance with minimum limits of liability of $1,000,000.00

each claim, $2,000,000.00 aggregate.

5. Owner’s and Contractor’s Protective Liability Policy, including Death

$2,000,000.00 each occurrence; Property Damage $2,000,000.00 each occurrence,

$2,000,000.00 aggregate.

(b) The Commercial General Liability and the Commercial Automobile Liability

Insurance coverages and their respective limits set forth in Section (a) of this Article are being

explicitly required and obtained to insure the indemnity obligations set forth in Section (a) of

Article X to meet the requirements of 434.100.2(8) R.S.Mo. The parties further acknowledge

that the cost of these insurance coverages is included in the Contract Price and that the limits

and coverages afforded by them is the Contractor’s total aggregate liability under the indemnity

obligations set forth in Section (a) of Article X.

(c) Contractor’s Commercial Automobile Liability, Commercial General Liability, and

Professional Liability policies – and any excess policies necessary to meet the required limits –



will include contractual liability coverage. The City will be named as an additional insured on the

Contractor’s Commercial General Liability policy by using ISO Additional Insured Endorsement

(Form B), CG 20 10 11 85. The Commercial General Liability, Commercial Automobile Liability

and required excess policies will include a severability or cross-liability clause and such

insurance will be endorsed to make such insurance primary with respect to any applicable

insurance maintained by the City. The Contractor’s Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s

Liability policy will include the Owner as an alternate employer by using ISO Alternate Employer

WC 00 03 01A.

(d) Contractor waives any rights of subrogation under its Professional Liability

Insurance policy for the City’s benefit and is doing so before commencing any of the Work.

(e) Contractor will furnish an insurance certificate to City evidencing that it has met the

insurance requirements of this Article, including attaching the requisite additional insured,

primary and alternate employer endorsements. These documents must be provided before

beginning the Work and upon each renewal of the coverage during the performance of the

Work. The certificate will provide that thirty-day written notice will be given to City before any

policy is canceled. Contractor will give written notice to City as soon as it receives written notice

of cancellation from any of its insurance carriers. The certificate of insurance must clearly

designate the name of the Project.

ARTICLE XII

The Work

The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the

renovation Brentwood City Hall. The Scope of Work includes:



Renovation of a portion of the first floor of city hall as indicated in the construction

documents.

Replacement of mechanical systems serving the renovated area.

Extension of sprinkler system into the first floor and the renovated space.

Replacement of existing panel boards and modifications to the incoming electrical

service.

ARTICLE XIII

Notices

Any notice hereunder shall be personally delivered or mailed, postage prepaid, by

certified mail, return receipt requested addressed to:

City of Brentwood

8756 Eulalie Ave, Brentwood, MO 63144 Brentwood, Missouri 63144 Attention: Kyle Allen

or to Contractor at:

_____________________

_____________________

_____________________

Attention: _____________



*In making out this form the proper name and title should be used. For example, if the Contractor is a corporation and this form is to be executed by its president, the words

President should be used under Title. Attestation should be done by the Secretary of the Corporation. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement: CITY OF BRENTWOOD By:___________________________

David A. Dimmitt, Mayor (SEAL) Attest: Bola Akande, City Administrator DATE: By: Contractor Title (SEAL) Attest: DATE:



FORM OF CONTRACT PERFORMANCE - PAYMENT BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That , as Principal of , State of _______________and a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of , and regularly authorized to do business in the State of Missouri, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Brentwood, Missouri, hereinafter called the "City," in the penal sum of ___________________________Dollars ($ ) lawful money of the United States, well and truly to be paid unto the said City for the payment of which Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has by written agreement dated , entered into a Contract with the City for the construction of the Work designated as__________________________ located at ______________________________________in the State of Missouri, in accordance with the Contract, which Contract is by this reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the “Contract.” NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if the Principal shall faithfully perform the Contract on its part, and satisfy all claims and demands incurred by the Principal in the performance of the Contract, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the City from all cost and damage which the City may suffer by reason of the failure of the Principal to do so, and shall fully reimburse and repay to the City all costs, damages, and expenses which the City may incur in making good any default by the Principal including, but not limited to, any default based upon the failure of the Principal to fulfill its obligation to furnish maintenance, repairs or replacements for any period of time after the Work is completed as provided for in the Contract, and shall for use in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract whether by Subcontract or otherwise, and shall pay all valid claims and demands whatsoever, and shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the City and its agents against loss or expense from bodily injury, including death, or damage or destruction of property, including loss of use resulting there from, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise, it shall remain in full force and effect. The City may sue on this Bond, and any person furnishing material or performing labor, either as an individual or as a Subcontractor shall have the right to sue on this Bond in the name of the City for his use and benefit, all in accordance with the provisions of MO. Rev. Stat SS 522.300, and any amendments thereto. Whenever Principal shall be in default under the Contract, the Surety shall promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly, (1) complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, or (2) obtain bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, and upon determination by the City of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a Contract between the City and such bidder, and made available as the Work progresses sufficient funds to pay the costs of completion, not exceeding the amount of this Bond. It is hereby stipulated and agreed that any suit based upon any default of the Principal in fulfilling his obligation to furnish maintenance, repairs or replacements for any period of time after the Work is completed as provided for in the Contract, may be brought at any time up to



one year after the expiration of the time specified in the Contract during which the Contractor has agreed to furnish such maintenance or make such repairs or replacements. Contractor shall make payment of any and all materials, incorporated, consumed or used in connection with the construction of such work, and all insurance premiums, both for compensation, and for all other kinds of insurance, said work, and for all labor performed in such work whether by subcontractor or otherwise as required by Sec. 107.170, RSMo.

The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration of addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work or to the Specifications.

Signed and sealed this day of , 2019, In the presence of: (SEAL) By:_______________________________ (SEAL) By:______________________________

City of Brentwood, Missouri Brentwood Fier House ADA Upgrades - 2019

Information for Bidders 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TITLE Page

Invitation for Bids ..................................................................................................................... 3

Information for Bidders: Article 1 - Definition ......................................................................................................... 4 Article 2 - Bidder's Representations ................................................................................. 4 Article 3 - Bidding Documents ......................................................................................... 5 Article 4 - Bidding Procedure ........................................................................................... 6 Article 5 - Consideration of Bids ...................................................................................... 8 Article 6 - Post Bid Information ........................................................................................ 8 Article 7 - Award of Contract ............................................................................................ 9 Article 8 - Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond ............................. 9 Article 9 - Form of Agreement between City and Contractor .......................................... 10 Article 10 - Bid Form Proposal ....................................................................................... 11 Itemized Bid Form .…………………………………………………………….... 12 Subcontractor Approval Form ...................................................................... 13 Non-Collusion Affidavit ................................................................................ 14 Statement of Brentwood Qualifications ........................................................ 15 Instructions for Executing Contract ........................................................................................... 17

City-Contractor Agreement Article I - The Contract Documents.............................................................................. C-1 Article II - Scope of Work ............................................................................................ C-1 Article III - Time of Completion .................................................................................... C-2 Article IV - The Contract Sum & Payments ................................................................. C-2 Article V - Performance of the Work ............................................................................ C-3 Article VI - Delays Beyond Contractor's Control........................................................... C-4 Article VII - Changes in the Work ................................................................................ C-5 Article VIII - Termination .............................................................................................. C-6 Article IX - Contractor's Insurance ............................................................................... C-7 Article X - Indemnities ................................................................................................. C-8 Article XI - Insurance ................................................................................................... C-9 Article XII - The Work ................................................................................................ C-11 Article XIII - Notices ................................................................................................... C-12 Contract Signature Page ....................................................................................................... C-13 Form of Contract Performance-Payment Bond ..................................................................... C-14 General Conditions of City-Contractor Agreement Article 1 - Contract Documents ................................................................................. GC-1 Article 2 - City ........................................................................................................... GC-2 Article 3 - Contractor ................................................................................................ GC-2 Article 4 - Subcontractors ......................................................................................... GC-5 Article 5 - Separate Contracts .................................................................................. GC-7 Article 6 - General Provisions ................................................................................... GC-8 Article 7 - Time ......................................................................................................... GC-9



TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) General Conditions of City-Contractor Agreement (Continued) Article 8 - Payments and Completion........................................................................ GC-9 Article 9 - Protection of Persons and Property ........................................................ GC-11 Article 10 - Property Insurance ............................................................................... GC-12 Article 11 - Changes in the Work ............................................................................ GC-13 Article 12 - Uncovering and Correction of Work ..................................................... GC-13 Article 13 - Miscellaneous ....................................................................................... GC-14 Article 14 - Equal Opportunity and Non-Discrimination ........................................... GC-20 Article 15 - Conflicts of Interest ............................................................................... GC-21 Article 16 - Alien Registration, Compliance, and Enforcement ................................ GC-21 Article 17 - Safety Programs, Compliance, and Penalties ....................................... GC-23 Article 18 - Periods of Excessive Unemployment ................................................... GC-24 Contractor’s Affidavit for Public Construction Projects ....................................................... GC-25 Project Specifications: See section 000115 Drawings: See section 000115 Prevailing Wage Determination



INVITATION FOR BIDS

The City of Brentwood is accepting sealed bids for the Brentwood Fire House ADA Upgrades Project. Bids will be received by the Office of the Deputy City Clerk, 88775566 EEuullaalliiee AAvvee, Brentwood, MO 63144, until 2:00 PM CST on October 15, 2019. The bids will then be publicly opened and read aloud at Brentwood Fire House at 2:00PM CST. Bids received after 2:00 pm CST will be returned unopened. Faxed bids will not be accepted. Bidders shall submit two copies of bid proposal. The Scope of Work regards ADA Upgrades at the Brentwood Fire House located at 88775566 EEuullaalliiee AAvvee,, Brentwood, MO 63144. The work consists of Architectural, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Mechanical and

Electrical Work, as more specifically set forth in the Contract Documents. Each bidder shall submit a lump sum price for all work required to complete the project. The City intends to issue the Notice to Proceed on or before November 1, 2019.

Bid packages will be available from County Blue and available for view at the Fire House, 88775566

EEuullaalliiee AAvvee, Brentwood Mo 63144 starting October 1, 2019. A pre-bid meeting will be held on October 8, 2019 at 1:30 PM. at the Brentwood Fire House. A pre-bid walk-through will be held after the pre bid meeting. Not less than the prevailing hourly rate of wages shall be paid to all workmen performing under this contract in this area according to the current rates determined by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations of the State of Missouri. The City reserves the right to accept or reject any and all bids and waive any irregularities in the best interest of the City.



INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS

ARTICLE 1

DEFINITIONS

1.1 Bidding Documents include the Invitation to Bid, Information for Bidders, the Bid Form and the proposed Contract Documents including any Addenda issued prior to receipt of bids. The Contract Documents proposed for the Work consists of the City-Contractor Agreement, State Wage Determination, Non-Collusion Affidavit, Performance Payment Bond, the Drawings, the Specifications, the Construction Schedule, all Addenda, and all Modifications. 1.2 All definitions set forth in the General Conditions of City-Contractor Agreement or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the City-Contractor Agreement which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 1.4 A bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work or a designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. 1.5 The base bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base to which work may be added or from which work may be deleted for sums stated in alternate bids. 1.6 An alternate bid is an amount stated in the Bid to be considered in place of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. 1.7 A unit price is an amount stated in the bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the Bidding Documents or in the proposed Contract Documents. 1.8 A bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid. 1.9 A sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a bidder for materials or labor for a portion of the Work.

ARTICLE 2

BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS

2.1 Each bidder by making its bid represents and warrants that: 2.1.1 It has read and understands the Bidding Documents and its Bid is made in accordance therewith.



2.1.2 It has visited the site, has familiarized themselves with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated its observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. 2.1.3 Its bid is based upon the materials, products, systems and equipment required by the Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 3

BIDDING DOCUMENTS

3.1 COPIES 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. 3.1.2 Each bidder shall use a complete set of Bidding Documents in preparing its bid.

3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.2.1 Bidders shall promptly notify the City of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error which they may discover upon examination of the Bidding Documents or of the site and local conditions. 3.2.2 Bidders may request clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents by making a written request which shall reach the City at least seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of bids. 3.2.3 Any interpretation, correction or change of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections or changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon such interpretations, corrections and changes. 3.2.4 If the City determines that clarification of the terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents is necessary, an Addendum will be made available to all Bidders setting forth-such clarification.

3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 3.3.1 The materials, products, systems and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a minimum standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality which must be met by any proposed substitution. 3.3.2 No substitution of the materials, products, systems and equipment described in the Bidding Documents will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the City at least seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Each such request shall include the name of the material, product, system or equipment for which substitution will be made and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawings, costs, performance and test data and any other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in other materials, products, systems or equipment or other Work that incorporation of the substitute would require shall be included in each such request. The City, in its sole discretion, may approve or disapprove the proposed substitute.



3.3.3 If the City approves any proposed substitution prior to receipt of bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract is awarded unless specifically provided in the Contract Documents at the time of the award.

3.4 ADDENDA 3.4.1 Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the City to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. 3.4.3 No addenda will be issued later than four (4) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids, except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of bids. 3.4.4 Prior to submitting its bid, each bidder shall ascertain that it has received all Addenda issued, and it shall acknowledge receipt of all such Addenda in its bid.

ARTICLE 4

BIDDING PROCEDURE

4.1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS 4.1.1 Attached to the Contract Documents is a separate, complete set of Bid Forms to be signed and submitted as the Contractor's formal bid. 4.1.2 All blanks on the Bid Form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink. 4.1.3 Where so indicated by the make-up of the Bid Form, dollar amounts shall be expressed in both words and figures and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amounts written in words shall govern. 4.1.4 Any interlineations, alteration or erasure must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. 4.1.5 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without forfeiture of its bid security, state its refusal to accept award of less than the combination of bids it so stipulates. The bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify its bid in any other manner. 4.1.6 Each copy of the bid shall comply with the requirements of the bid instructions. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract. A bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the bidder.



4.2 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4.2.1 Bidders must complete and submit with their bids the “Non-Collusion Affidavit" included with the Bid Form and a 5% Bid Bond. Bidders shall also complete and submit the following:

1. a designation of the Work, item by item, including the related dollar amount and total dollar amount, to be performed by the bidder with its own forces;

2. the proprietary names and suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and

equipment proposed for the Work.

3. Subcontractor Approval Form for each and every proposed Subcontractor, or other persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work;

4. Statement of Qualifications Form list of at least three (3) similar projects currently

under contract and three (3) projects completed by the Contractor or listed Subcontractor with the last two (2) years;

5. Subcontractor/Vendor Questionnaire Form

4.2.2 All copies of the bid, and any other documents required to be submitted with the bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to Office of the Deputy City Clerk, 2348 South Brentwood Blvd., Brentwood, MO 63144 and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the bid is submitted. If the bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. 4.2.3 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of bids indicated in the invitation to bid or any extension thereof made by an Addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of bids will be returned unopened. 4.2.4 The bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of bids.

4.3 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID 4.3.1 A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or cancelled by the bidder within Ninety (90) days following the time and date designated for the receipt of bids, and each bidder so agrees in submitting its bid. 4.3.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of bids, any bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving bids at the place designated for receipt of bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the bidder or by electronic mail with proof of receipt by the city. If by electronic mail, written confirmation over the signature of the bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids, and it shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original bid. 4.3.3 Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these instructions to bidders.



ARTICLE 5

CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

5.1 OPENING OF BIDS 5.1.1 Unless stated otherwise in the Invitation to Bid, the properly identified bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud.

5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS 5.2.1 The City shall have the right to reject any or all bids, to reject a bid not accompanied by a Bid bond if required or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, to reject a bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular and to rebid the Work at a later date if all bids are rejected.

5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) 5.3.1 The City may make any investigation of a bidder as it deems necessary to determine the ability of a bidder to perform the Work. Bidders shall furnish information regarding their qualifications upon the reasonable request of the City. The City reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or other investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City that the bidder has the proper qualifications to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract.

5.3.2 It is the intent of the City to award the Contract to the lowest responsible bidder provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. However, the City reserves the right to accept the bid which, in the City's judgment, is in the best interest of and most advantageous to the City. The City shall have the right to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid or bids received and to accept the bid or bids which, in its judgment, is in the City's own best interests. 5.3.3 The City shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low bidder on the basis of the sum of the base bid and the alternates accepted.

ARTICLE 6

POST BID INFORMATION

6.1 SUBMITTALS 6.1.1 The bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the City the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work. 6.1.2 Prior to the award of the contract, the City will notify the bidder in writing if the City, after due investigation, objects to any such person or entity proposed by the bidder pursuant to Subparagraph 4.3.1 above. If the City objects to any such proposed person or entity, the bidder may, at its option, (1) withdraw its bid, or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with no adjustment in its bid price.



6.1.3 Persons and entities proposed by the bidder and to whom the City has made no objection under the provisions of Subparagraph 6.1.2 must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the prior written consent of the City.

ARTICLE 7

AWARD OF CONTRACT

7.1 Following receipt to the satisfaction of the City of all information required under Paragraph 6.1 above and approval by the applicable governing bodies, the City shall mail to the successful bidder the Notice of Award of the Contract. 7.2 Within five (5) working days from the date of receipt of the Notice of Award, the successful bidder shall execute and deliver to the City the Contract Documents, and shall furnish the Bonds required by Paragraph 8.1 below and the Certificates of Insurance required by subparagraph 10.1.3 of the General conditions. In the event the successful bidder fails to execute and deliver the contract Documents, the Bonds and the Certificates of Insurance as aforesaid, the City may, at its option, consider the bidder in default and award the Contract of another bidder, in which case the Bid Bond of the defaulting bidder shall be forfeited to the City.

ARTICLE 8

PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND

8.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS 8.1.1 The Contractor shall furnish Performance and Payment Bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum as security for the faithful performance of this Contract. The surety shall be a company licensed to do business in the State of Missouri and shall be acceptable to the Owner. The Performance Bond and the Labor and Material Payment Bond may be in one or in separate instruments.

8.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS 8.2.1 The bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the City not later than the date of execution of the City-Contractor Agreement, or if the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the City that such bonds will be furnished. 8.2.2 The bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of its power of attorney.



ARTICLE 9

FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN CITY AND CONTRACTOR

9.1 FORM TO BE USED 9.1.1 The City-Contractor Agreement for the Work shall be in the form attached hereto.


Bid Form 11

ARTICLE 10

BID FORM PROPOSAL

BID TIME BID DATE

TO: THE CITY OF BRENTWOOD

The bidder declares that it has had an opportunity to examine the site of the work and it has examined the contract documents therefore, and that it has prepared its proposal upon the basis thereof, , having carefully examined the site and having read and understood all the Contract Documents, adding Addenda through , for the

City of Brentwood Fire House ADA Upgrade Project

and being familiar with the local conditions affecting the work, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services required for the performance and completion of said project in accordance with the said Contract Documents or the following itemized bid. ____________________________________ (Signature) ____________________________________ (Print Name) ____________________________________ (Company Name) ____________________________________ (Address) ____________________________________ (Telephone Number) (Seal - If bid by Corporation)


Bid Form 12

ITEMIZED BID FORM

BASE BID

EXTENDED

ITEM

DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTI

TY PRICE

1 ADA Upgrades LS 1

TOTAL BASE BID

Alternate Bids

EXTENDED

ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTI

TY PRICE

1 None Noted

2

3

4

A dollar value unit cost must be filled in for each item indicated above. Any bid form that does not include a separate dollar value for each item will be deemed non-responsive and will not be considered. Any proposal that lists “not required”, “$0”, or “no bid” in lieu of a dollar value will be deemed non-responsive and will not be considered. __________________________________ ________________________________ (Signature) (Print Name) __________________________________ (Print Title)


Bid Form 13

SUBCONTRACTOR APPROVAL FORM

This report must accompany and be part of the sealed bid proposal. 1. Name of Bidder:____________________________________ 2. Address Bidder:____________________________________ _____________________________________ City State Zip Phone 3. The above-named bidder intends to subcontract for materials, services, supplies, specialty contractors, etc., in the following fashion: Names and Addresses of Subcontractor Nature of $ Value of Which the Contractor Anticipates Utilizing Participation Subcontractor _______________________________________ ___________ ___________ _______________________________________ ___________ ___________ _______________________________________ ___________ ___________ _______________________________________ ___________ ___________ A. Total of Above ___________ B. Total Bid Amount ___________ Subcontractor Utilization as a % of Total Bid Amount: (A/B x 100) ________ The General Contractor shall perform 51% of the contract with its own company. _______________________________ Name-Authorized Officer of Bidder _______________________________ Signature-Office Bidder _______________________________ Date


Non-Collusion Affidavit 14

The City of Brentwood, Missouri reserves the right, before any award of the Contract is made, to require of any bidder to whom it may make an award of the Contract, a non-collusion affidavit in the form designated below:

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT

STATE OF , COUNTY OF , , being first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is____________*(sole owner, partner, president, secretary, etc.) of____________________, the party making the foregoing bid; that such bid is not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization or corporation; that such bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that said bidder had not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that any one shall refrain from bidding; that said bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of said bidder or of any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of such bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract or anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in such bid are true; and, further, that said bidder had not, directly or indirectly, submitted its bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid and will not pay any fee in connection therewith to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof, or to any other individual except to such person or persons as have a partnership or other financial interest with said bidder in its general business. SIGNED:

(Title)

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 2019. Seal of Notary ______________________ Notary Public


Statement of Qualifications 15 18

Statement of Qualifications (To be submitted by the Bidder with Bid)

All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The Bidder may submit any additional information it desires. 1. Company Name __________________________________________________________

Phone Number and Fax ____________________________________________________ 2. Permanent Main Office Address______________________________________________ 3. When Organized __________________________________________________________ 4. If a corporation, where incorporated ___________________________________________ 5. Number of years in business _________________________________________________

If not under present firm name, list previous firm names and types of organizations. ________________________________________________________________________

6. Contracts on hand (complete the following schedule)

Project & Address Owner Owner’s Representative Contract Amount % Complete

7. General character of work performed by your company____________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ 8. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, why? ______________ __________________________________________________________________________ 9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, why? ______________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________

continued on next page.


Statement of Qualifications 16 18

10. The following are the more important projects completed in the last five (5) years. Attach additional sheets if necessary.

Site Owner Representative Address Date Completed

The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or corporation to furnish any information requested by the City in verification of the recitals comprising this Statement of Bidder’s Qualifications. Date at ___________this_______day of _________________, 2019. Name of Bidder By:___________________________________________ Title:__________________________________________


Execution of Contract 17 18

INSTRUCTIONS FOR EXECUTING CONTRACT

The Contractor, in executing the Contract, shall follow the following requirements:

The Contractor and the Owner shall sign the Contract Documents in not less than triplicate.

If the Contractor is a corporation, the following certificate shall be executed:

I, certify that I am the secretary of the corporation named as Contractor herein above, that who signed the foregoing Contract on behalf of the Contractor was then of said corporation; that said Contract was duly signed for and in behalf of said corporation by Authority of its governing body, and is within the scope of its corporate powers. If the Contract is signed by the secretary of the corporation, the above certificate shall be executed by some other officer of the corporation under the corporate seal. In lieu of the foregoing certificate there may be attached to the contract copies of as much of the records of the corporation as will show the official character and authority of the officers signing, duly certified by the secretary or assistant secretary under the corporate seal to be true copies. If the Contractor is a partnership, each partner shall sign the Contract. If the Contract is not signed by each partner, there shall be attached to the Contract a duly authenticated power of attorney evidencing the signer's (signers") authority to sign such a Contract for and in behalf of the partnership. If the Contractor is an individual, the trade name (if the Contractor is operating under a trade name) shall be indicated in the Contract and the Contract shall be signed by such individual. If signed by one other than the Contractor there shall be attached to the Contract a duly authenticated power of attorney evidencing the signer's authority to execute such contract for and in behalf of the Contractor. The full name and business address of the Contractor shall be inserted and the Contract shall be signed with its official signature. The name of the signing party or parties shall be typewritten or printed under all signatures to the Contract. The Contract shall be deemed as having been awarded when formal notice of award shall have been duly served upon the intended awardee (i.e., the Bidder with whom the Owner contemplates entering into a Contract) by some officer or agent of the Owner duly authorized to give such notice.


Execution of Contract 18 18

TTHHIISS PPAAGGEE LLEEFFTT BBLLAANNKK IINNTTEENNTTIIOONNAALLLLYY

City of Brentwood, Missouri Brentwood Fire House ADA Upgrades - 2019

General Conditions of City-Contractor Agreement GC-1

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CITY-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT

ARTICLE 1

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.1 DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 The Contract Documents. The Contract Documents consists of the City-Contractor Agreement, General Conditions of the City-Contractor Agreement, Non-Collusion Affidavit, the Performance and Payment Bond, the Drawings, the Technical Specifications, the Construction Schedule, all Addenda and all Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, or (2) a Change Order. 1.1.2 The Contract. The Contract documents form the Contract. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations or agreements, both written and oral, including the bidding documents. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification as defined in Subparagraph 1.1.1. 1.1.3 The Work. The term Work includes all labor necessary to complete the construction required by the Contract Documents, and all materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction. 1.1.4 The Project. The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part. 1.1.5 Notice to Proceed. The written notice from the City notifying the Contractor of the date on or before which Contractor is to begin prosecution of the work. 1.1.6 Standard Specifications: The St. Louis County Standard Specifications for Highway Construction (Jan. 1, 1997 edition). 1.1.7 Substantial Completion: The state in the progress of the Work when the Work or a designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the City can reasonably occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION, INTENT AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed in not less than triplicate by the City and Contractor. 1.2.2 The Contractor represents that Contractor has visited the site, become familiar with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated any observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. The intention of the Contract Documents is to include all labor, materials, equipment and other items as provided in Subparagraph 3.3 necessary for



execution and completion of the Work. Words which have well-known technical or trade meanings are used herein in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.3 COPIES FURNISHED AND OWNERSHIP 1.3.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished a maximum of six (6) copies, free of charge, of the Drawings and Specifications for the execution of the work. 1.3.2 All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof furnished by the City are and shall at all times remain property of the City. Such documents shall not be used on any other project.

ARTICLE 2

CITY 2.1 DEFINITION 2.1.1 The term City means the City or its authorized representative. 2.2 CITY'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.2.1 If the Contractor fails to correct defective Work or fails to supply materials or equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents, the City may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated. 2.3 CITY'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or fails to perform any provision of the Contract, the City may, after three (3) days' written notice to the Contractor and without prejudice to any other remedy City may have, make good such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the City promptly upon request.

ARTICLE 3

CONTRACTOR

3.1 DEFINITION 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or organization identified as such in the City-Contractor Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender. The term Contractor means the Contractor or Contractor’s authorized representative. The Contractor shall not subcontract except in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.



3.2 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.2.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using his best skill and attention. Contractor shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work. 3.3 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 3.3.1 Unless otherwise specifically noted, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him. If the City reasonably objects to any person employed by the Contractor, the employee shall be immediately dismissed from the Work. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall execute and complete the Work in such a manner that avoids jurisdictional and other disputes among labor unions. 3.3.4 The Contractor shall comply with, and is bound by, the provisions of Missouri statutes pertaining to the payment of wages on public works projects contained in sections 290.210 through 290.340 (RSMo 2000), and any amendments thereto, including, but not limited to the following: 1) In accordance with section 290.250, the Contractor shall not pay less than the

prevailing hourly rate of wages specified by the Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations Division of Labor Standards to all workers performing Work under the Agreement.

2) In accordance with section 290.250, the Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City ten dollars ($10.00) for each worker employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such worker is paid less than the said stipulated rates for any Work done under the Agreement, by him or by any Subcontractor under him and shall include provisions in all bonds guaranteeing the faithful performance of said prevailing hourly wage clause.

3) In accordance with section 290.265, the Contractor shall post a clearly legible statement of all prevailing hourly wage rates to be paid to all workers employed to complete the Work in a prominent and easily accessible place at the site of the Work and such notice shall remain posted during the full time that any workers shall be employed on the Work. 4) Certified payrolls shall also be submitted prior to final payment for all Work completed by the Contractor or Subcontractors.

5) In accordance with section 290.290, before final payment is made an affidavit must

be filed by the Contractor stating that he has fully complied with the prevailing wage law. No payment shall be made unless and until this affidavit is filed therewith in proper form and order.



3.4 WARRANTY 3.4.1 The Contractor warrants to the City that all materials and equipment furnished under the Contract and incorporated in the Work will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all Work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not so conforming to these standards shall be considered defective. If required by the City, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of all materials and equipment. 3.5 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.5.1 The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, governmental fees and licenses necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. 3.5.2 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work. If the Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any respect, he shall promptly notify the City in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted by appropriate Modification. If the Contractor performs any Work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations and without such notice to the City, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility thereof and shall bear all costs attributable thereto. 3.6 SUPERINTENDENT 3.6.1 This person shall be a non-working superintendent who will be responsible for the satisfactory progression of the work and to ensure that all work is being completed in accordance with the plans and specifications. This person is also to relay any conflicts or discrepancies that arise in the plans to the City's representative for resolution or interpretation. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. 3.7 RESPONSIBILITY FOR THOSE PERFORMING THE WORK 3.7.1 The Contractor shall be responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of all his employees and all Subcontractors, their agents and employees and all other persons performing any of the Work under a Contract with the Contractor. 3.8 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AT THE SITE 3.8.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the City one copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, approved Shop Drawings, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked to record all changes made during construction. The Drawings, marked to record all changes made during construction, shall be delivered to the City upon completion of the Work. The Contractor shall also maintain on the project site a survey level, legs, and rod at all times, which are deemed adequate by the project engineer. 3.9 CLEANING UP AND STORAGE 3.9.1 The Contractor at all times shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by his operations. The Contractor shall not "stockpile" any material on the jobsite and all excavated material shall be hauled off the site at the time of excavation.



However, stockpiling of materials delivered and used on the same day will be allowed if all materials are in place or removed at the end of the day. 3.9.2 In conjunction with Sec. 106.5 of the Standard Specifications, the Contractor is responsible for securing his own project storage site which shall not be located on City Right-of-Way without prior written consent of the Director of Public Works. After completion of the Work the Contractor shall remove all remaining waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project as well as all tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials, and shall clean all surfaces and leave the Work "broom clean" or its equivalent, except as otherwise specified. 3.9.3 The Contractor shall make satisfactory arrangements to store material and equipment after delivery and during construction off of the City right-of-way. The City will assume no responsibility for these arrangements. 3.10 CASH ALLOWANCES 3.10.1 The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that the Contract Sum includes all cash allowances specified in the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 4

SUBCONTRACTORS 4.1 DEFINITION 4.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or organization who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work. 4.1.2 Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between the City and any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor. 4.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 4.2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents or in the Instructions to Bidders, the Contractor shall submit a completed and signed Subcontractor Approval form, along with other required Bid documents to the City. Contractor shall complete and submit a Supplemental Subcontractor Approval form to the City in the event of any substitution or addition of a Subcontractor by the Contractor. No work shall be performed by a Subcontractor until such Subcontractor has been approved by the City. 4.2.2 Prior to the award of the Contract, the City will notify the Bidder in writing if the City, after due investigation, objects to any such person or entity proposed by the Bidder pursuant to Subparagraph 4.2.1 above. If the City objects to any such proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at his option, (1) withdraw his Bid, or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with no adjustment in his bid price.



4.2.3 Contractor shall at all times during the term of the Contract be in compliance with Sec. 108.1 of the Standard Specifications and shall not subcontract more than forty nine percent (49%) of the total Contract cost. 4.2.4 The City reserves the right to reject a Subcontractor, if in the City's sole discretion, delays may result in the performance of Work as a result of Subcontractor's other obligation. The Contractor shall be held responsible, in addition to the submission of the "Subcontractor Approval Form," to apprise the City of any additional work which a Subcontractor accrues throughout the duration of the project. This shall include work for the City under a different Contract, or any other person or entity. If such said additional work shall detrimentally impact the progression of the Work under this Contract, the City retains the right to require the Contractor to submit a substitute Subcontractor for this work at no additional cost to the City. 4.2.5 The Contractor shall not contract with any Subcontractor or any person or organization (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design), for proposed proportions of the Work designated in the Contract Documents or in the Instruction to Bidders or, if none is so designated, with any Subcontractor proposed for the principal portions of the Work, who has been rejected by the City. 4.2.6 If the City requires a change of any proposed Subcontractor or person or organization during the execution of the Work approved under the present Contract, the Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost resulting from such change and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. 4.2.7 The Contractor shall not make any substitution for any proposed Subcontractor or person or organization that has not been accepted by the City prior to the Contract Award, unless the substitution is accepted by the City in writing prior to such substitution. 4.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 4.3.1 All work performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between the Contractor and Subcontractor (and where appropriate between Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors) which shall contain provisions that: 1) require the Work to be performed in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents; 2) require submission to the Contractor of applications for payment under each

Subcontract to which the Contractor is a party, in reasonable time to enable the Contractor to apply for payment in accordance with Article 8 hereof;

3) require that all claims for additional costs, extensions of time, damages for delays or

otherwise with respect to Subcontracted portions of the Work shall be submitted to the Contractor (via any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor where appropriate) in sufficient time so that the Contractor may comply in the manner provided in the Contract Documents for like claims by the Contractor upon the City;

4) waive all rights the contracting parties may have against one another for damages

caused by fire or other perils covered by the property insurance described in Article 10 except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the City as trustee;



5) obligate each Subcontractor specifically to consent to the provisions of this

Paragraph 4.3; and 6) require the Subcontractor (and the Sub-subcontractor’s to indemnify and hold

harmless the City against all claims, damages, losses, expenses and attorneys' fees arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work by Subcontractor, and its agents and employees, unless such claims, damages or losses are caused solely by the negligent act of the City.

4.4 PAYMENTS TO SUBCONTRACTORS 4.4.1 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor upon receipt of payment from the City, an amount equal to the percentage of completion allowed to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's Work, less the percentage retained from payments to the Contractor. The Contractor shall also require each Subcontractor to make similar payments to his Subcontractors. 4.4.2 If the City withholds payment to the Contractor for any cause that is the fault of the Contractor and not the fault of a particular Subcontractor, the Contractor shall pay that Subcontractor on demand for its Work to the extent completed. 4.4.3 The City shall not have any obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any sum to any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor.

ARTICLE 5

SEPARATE CONTRACTS 5.1 CITY'S RIGHT TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 5.1.1 The City reserves the right to award other contracts on other terms and conditions in connection with other portions of the Project. 5.1.2 During construction, it may become necessary to increase the amount of excavation or to utilize a soil stabilization process if unsuitable subgrade conditions are found. The Contractor shall immediately contact the project engineer if this condition occurs. The project engineer and the Contractor shall agree upon the existence of unsuitable subgrade, the depth in which to remove the unsuitable soil, and the extent of the problem area prior to any additional work. No payment will be made for any area that undergoes additional excavation that is not indicated in the above scope of work and has not been approved by the project engineer prior to the excavation. All additional excavation that becomes necessary shall be paid at the unit bid price for "Excavation." The City reserves the right to contract with a separate contractor for the use of a soil stabilization process. No direct payment will be made for delays incurred due to this process and the Contractor's only compensation will be the allotment of additional days for the delay. The number of days shall be from the time the Contractor initially notifies the City of an unsuitable subgrade condition and until two days after the completion of the soil stabilization process.



5.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS 5.2.1 The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the delivery and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall properly connect and coordinate the Work with theirs. 5.2.2 If any part of the Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any other separate contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the City any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it unsuitable for proper execution of the Work. Failure of the Contractor so to inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and proper to receive the Work, except as to defects which may develop in the other contractor's work after the execution of the Contractor's Work that could not have been discovered by the Contractor upon reasonable inspection. 5.2.3 If the Contractor causes damage to the work or property of any other contractor on the Project, and such separate contractor sues the City or initiates an arbitration proceeding on account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the City shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at Contractor’s own expense, and if any judgment or award against the City arises therefrom the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall reimburse the City for all attorneys' fees and court or arbitration costs which the City has incurred. 5.3 CITY'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 5.3.1 If a dispute arises between the separate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up as required by Paragraph 3.9, the City may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the several contractors.

ARTICLE 6

GENERAL PROVISIONS

6.1 GOVERNING LAW 6.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Missouri. 6.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 6.2.1 This Contract shall be binding upon the successors, assigns and legal representatives of each party in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract without the prior written consent of the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any sums due or to become due to him hereunder, without the prior written consent of the City. 6.3 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 6.3.1 The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.



6.4 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 6.4.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees payable on all designs, processes or products used in connection with the Work or incorporated therein, unless otherwise agreed upon by the City. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall indemnify and hold the City harmless from and against any loss on account thereof. 6.5 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND 6.5.1 The Contractor shall furnish the performance and payment bond required in the Instructions to Bidders.

ARTICLE 7

TIME

7.1 DEFINITIONS 7.1.1 The Contract Time is the period of time allotted in the City-Contractor Agreement for completion of the Work. Said work shall include all punchlist items deemed necessary by the City. The date of completion of the Contract shall be the date when all work including City punchlist items have been approved in writing by the City. 7.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the written Notice to Proceed from the City to the Contractor. 7.1.3. The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day. 7.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 7.2.1 All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. 7.2.2 The Contractor shall begin the Work on the date of commencement provided in the City-Contractor Agreement. The Contractor shall carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate forces and shall complete it within the Contract Time and in accordance with the Construction Schedule.

ARTICLE 8

PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 8.1 CONTRACT SUM 8.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the City-Contractor Agreement and is the total amount payable by the City to the Contractor for the performance of the Work.



8.2 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 8.2.1 By 12:00 P.M. on or before the twentieth day of the month, upon Substantial Completion of various stages of the Work, and upon final completion of the Work, the Contractor shall submit to the City an itemized Application for Payment pursuant to the City-Contractor Agreement on such forms and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the City may require. 8.2.2 If payments are to be made on account of materials or equipment to be incorporated into the Work and delivered and suitably stored at the site, such payments shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other documents satisfactory to the City to establish the City's title to such materials or equipment or to otherwise protect the City's interest. 8.2.3 The Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by an Application for Payment, whether incorporated into the Work or not, will pass to the City upon the receipt of such payment by the Contractor, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances (hereinafter referred to as "liens"). 8.3. PAYMENT 8.3.1 If the Contractor has made Application for Payment as above, the City will, in accordance with the City-Contractor Agreement, make payment to the Contractor for such amount as it determines to be properly due pursuant to the Contractor's Application for Payment, or state in writing the City's reasons for withholding all or any portion of such payment. 8.3.2 No progress payment, nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the Work by the City, shall constitute an acceptance of any Work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.4 COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 8.4.1 Upon receipt of written notice from the Contractor that the Work is fully completed and ready for final inspection and acceptance, and upon receipt of a final application for Payment, the City will promptly make such inspection and, when the City finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the City will make final payment to the Contractor in accordance with the City-Contractor Agreement. 8.4.2 The final payment shall not become due until the Contractor submits to the City (1) an Affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the execution and completion of the Work for which the City or its property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) consent of the surety, if any, to final payment, (3) if required by the City, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the City and (4) Prevailing Wage Affidavit as required by subsection 3.3.4. If any Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the City, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the City indemnifying the City against any such lien. If any such lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the City all moneys that the City may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees.



8.4.3 The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a satisfaction of all claims by the Contractor, except those previously made in writing and still unsettled.

ARTICLE 9

PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 9.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 9.1.1 The Contractor shall initiate, maintain and supervise safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Work. 9.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 9.2.1 The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1) all employees on the Work and all other persons who may be affected thereby; 2) all the Work, all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in

storage on or off the site, under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors; and

3) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees (following the ISA

standard for tree protection), shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction.

9.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority having jurisdiction over the safety of persons or property to protect them from damage, injury or loss. The Contractor shall erect and maintain all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including a six foot solid wood or chain link construction fence as determined by the City, posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying City and users of adjacent utilities. The Contractor shall provide signs, barrels, or any other safety devices that the City deems necessary for public safety. No additional payment will be made and this work shall be considered incidental to the Contract. The City will place safety devices as it deems necessary if the Contractor fails to provide the required items within 24 hours of notification. In the event the City needs to do this, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the cost of these devices. 9.2.3 When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. 9.2.4 All damage or loss to any property caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by anyone for whose acts they may be liable, shall be remedied by the Contractor. The City shall document any complaint by any person regarding damage or loss to property caused by Contractor by requesting such complainant to complete a Damage Claim form. A copy of the Damage Claim form shall be submitted by the City to the Contractor and the Contractor shall



correct the problem, repair such damage or otherwise compensate the complainant or file a claim for such damage with Contractor's insurance company within ten (10) days of the receipt of the Damage Claim form from the city. If the City shall have a legitimate basis for believing that such claim is valid, the City shall have the option to withhold payment of funds until (i) such damages are repaired; or (ii) the City has been provided with evidence that the Contractor has made restitution to the complainant. 9.2.5 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the City.

ARTICLE 10

PROPERTY INSURANCE 10.1 PROPERTY INSURANCE 10.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the entire Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. This insurance shall include the interests of the City, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work and shall insure against the perils of Fire, Extended Coverage, Vandalism and Malicious Mischief. 10.1.2 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such steam, boiler and machinery insurance as may be required by the Contract Documents or by law. This insurance shall include the interests of the City, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work. 10.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the City shall be filed with the City prior to commencement of the work. Certificates of Insurance must state on the certificate: "The City of Brentwood is an additional insured." These Certificates shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be cancelled until at least fifteen days' prior written notice has been given to the City. 10.1.4 Any loss insured by property insurance maintained by the City shall be adjusted with the City and made payable to the City as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. 10.1.5 The City and Contractor waive all rights against each other for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance provided under this Article, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the City as trustee. The Contractor shall require similar waivers by Sub-contractors and Sub-subcontractors in accordance with Subparagraph 4.3.1.



ARTICLE 11

CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.1 CHANGE ORDERS 11.1.1 The City, without invalidating the Contract, may order Changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, with the Contract Sum and the Construction Schedule being adjusted in accordance with the City-Contractor Agreement. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be executed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. 11.1.2 A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the City, issued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Construction Schedule. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order. 11.1.3 The cost or credit to the City resulting from a Change in the Work shall be determined in accordance with the City-Contractor Agreement. 11.2 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST 11.2.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, he shall give the City written notice thereof within twenty (20) days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim. This notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. Any change in the Contract Sum resulting from such claim shall be authorized by Change Order. 11.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.3.1 The City shall have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Construction Schedule and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes may be effected by written Field Order or by other written order. Such changes shall be binding on the City and the Contractor.

ARTICLE 12

UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 If any Work should be covered contrary to the request of the City, it must, if required by the City, be uncovered for his observation and replaced, at the Contractor's expense. 12.1.2 If any Work has been covered which the City has not specifically requested to observe prior to being covered, the City may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Cost of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the City. If such Work be found not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs.



12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct all Work rejected by the City as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after substantial completion of the Work, and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear all cost of correcting such rejected Work. 12.2.2 If, within one year after the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the City. 12.2.3 All defective or non-conforming Work shall be removed from the site if necessary, and the Work shall be corrected to comply with the Contract Documents without additional cost to the City. 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work of separate contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or correction. 12.2.5 If the Contractor fails to correct such defective or non-conforming Work, the City may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.3. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NON-CONFORMING WORK 12.3.1 If the City prefers to accept defective or non-conforming Work, City may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect an appropriate reduction in the Contract Sum or, if the amount is determined after final payment, it shall be paid by the Contractor.

ARTICLE 13

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 SCHEDULING OF WORK AND INTERFERENCE WITH TRAFFIC 13.1.1 The Contractor's Work must be scheduled and accomplished in stages such that local traffic is maintained during construction. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide a traffic way that is usable in all weather conditions. The Contractor shall construct and maintain in a safe condition temporary pavements and connections for local traffic. 13.1.2 Temporary guardrail, or other suitable temporary barriers shall be provided to protect traffic from the Work. At all times until final acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall provide and maintain such signs, lights, watchmen and barriers, in addition to the temporary guardrail, as may be necessary to properly protect the Work and provide for safe and convenient public travel. 13.1.3 No additional payment shall be made for temporary guardrail, barriers, signs, lights, or other work as may be necessary to maintain traffic and to protect the work and the public and



all labor, equipment and material necessary to accomplish this task shall be considered incidental 13.2 ACCESS 13.2.1 Areas of intersections and roadways within the construction limits shall be constructed in phases so that at no time will access be denied. 13.2.2 Access to private driveways will be limited by the nature of the Work. The Contractor shall schedule his work such that at no time during the life of this Contract will any driveway be denied access for any reason other than the curing of concrete. All concrete, including curbs, sidewalks and driveway pavements, shall be formed and poured within a two calendar day period for each and every driveway. Excavation for this work shall be accomplished a maximum of one calendar day prior to forming, however, access shall be provided immediately after excavation. At the end of the curing period, access shall be immediately supplied using asphalt or compacted aggregate. The first lift of all asphalt drives shall be completed and paved within fourteen (14) calendar days of their excavation. 13.2.3 All temporary materials used for access will be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be included in the unit bid price for each related item. No separate payment will be made for the placement, maintenance or removal of said access. 13.2.4 If access is not supplied as set out above, the City will supply said access with its own forces, without notification to the Contractor, and will deduct such costs from the sums due the Contractor, notwithstanding any other provisions given this Contract. Wherever excavation affects pedestrian access to houses or public buildings, plank or other suitable bridges shall be placed at convenient intervals. 13.2.5 In the event any part of the Work to be performed hereunder shall require the Contractor or his Subcontractors to enter, cross or work upon or beneath the right-of-way or other property of a railroad, the Contractor shall comply with the related requirements for such Work as are set out in the Contract Documents. 13.3 CONSTRUCTION STAKING AND LAYOUT 13.3.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing labor, equipment and materials necessary for construction staking and layout as required, to the grades, elevations and alignment as determined by the City of Brentwood. No separate payment will be made for construction staking and layout. No payment shall be made for restaking except as expressly authorized due to changes made by the City during construction. 13.4 OVERTIME 13.4.1 In order to provide sufficient control of work, the Contractor shall be required to inform the City of scheduled overtime work, including work on Saturdays, Sundays and City holidays at least forty-eight (48) hours in advance of any such work. If the Contractor fails to appear on a scheduled overtime period, the City shall deduct the cost for the City's assigned personnel from the Contract Sum for the time period scheduled.



13.5 CITY HOLIDAYS 13.5.1 There are ten (10) city holidays. They are:

New Year’s Day Labor Day Martin Luther King, Jr. Day Veteran’s Day President’s Day Thanksgiving Day Memorial Day Day after Thanksgiving Independence Day Christmas Day

13.6 [Intentionally Left Blank] 13.7 INTERFERENCE WITH EXISTING WATER SERVICES AND MAINS 13.7.1 The Contractor shall minimize the outage of water service to residents. The cutting off of water service shall be only with the consent of the City. The Contractor shall notify the City and have their approval prior to commencing work on each water main or connection item. 13.7.2 The Contractor shall conduct his work in such a manner as not to endanger existing water mains, services or appurtenances. Mains and services shall be adequately supported where they cross or are adjacent to the excavation. The Contractor shall bear the cost of all repairs to water mains or appurtenances damaged because of contractor’s own carelessness or neglect. 13.8 INTERRUPTION OF WATER SERVICE 13.8.1 When it becomes necessary to shut down any existing water main, a representative of the City shall be notified to be present during this operation. The total time for the main to be shut down should be held to a minimum and in no case shall any customer be without water service for more than eight (8) hours. The Contractor shall notify each water customer whose water service will be interrupted at least one hour prior to shutdown. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for shutting down the main and notifying the customers. 13.9 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 13.9.1 A preconstruction conference may be held prior to the issuance of a Notice to Proceed with the Work. This meeting will be attended by the Contractor, and the City. The meeting date will be established after the taking of bids and at a time convenient to all parties. 13.10 SEQUENCE OF WORK 13.10.1 A schedule of the Contractor's work shall be submitted to the City for approval with a listing of the order in which the Contract items will be constructed and the approximate dates for starting and finishing each Contract item. 13.10.2 The City shall have the right to specify the order of construction as deemed necessary.



13.11 CONSTRUCTION LIMITS 13.11.1 The construction limits consist of the public street rights-of-way and acquired easement areas. The Contractor shall limit operations accordingly. The Contractor shall acquire the property owners' permission for any activity outside the public right-of-way or easement areas.

13.12 ALTERED QUANTITIES 13.12.1 In accordance with Section 109.3 of the Standard Specifications, the City reserves the right to make changes in plan details which may vary the accepted quantities from those shown on the Itemized Bid. 13.12.2 The Contractor shall accept, as payment in full, payment at the original Contract unit prices bid for the accepted quantities of work done. No allowance will be made for any increased expense or loss of expected profit suffered by the Contractor resulting directly from such altered quantities or indirectly from expenses derived by handling small quantities of materials or performing operations within restricted areas. No allowance shall be made for any increased expense or loss of expected profit suffered because of the anticipated use of specific equipment that was not used. 13.13 MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHED QUANTITIES 13.13.1 The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that the City requires that all weight certificates be signed by a bonded Weighmaster. The Contractor must furnish the City's inspector on the job site with original weight certificates signed by a bonded Weighmaster for all materials supplied by the Contractor that are incorporated into his improvement, which payment therefore is based on weight. 13.14 ADDITIONS TO CONTRACT 13.14.1 Unit prices in this Agreement may be used to negotiate a Change Order for additional work involving similar projects. 13.15 PURCHASE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 13.15.1 Sales to contractors who purchase construction materials and supplies to fulfill contracts for the City are not subject to sales tax. The City may monitor all supplies purchased, used, and consumed in fulfilling the project. 13.15.2 Contractors will be give a project exemption certificate. 13.15.3 Contractors must provide a copy of the City’s exemption letter and the project exemption certificate to suppliers when purchasing materials and supplies to be consumed in the project. 13.15.4 Contractors are not exempt from sales tax on the purchase of machinery, equipment or tools used in fulfilling these contracts. 13.15.5 Suppliers shall render to the contractor invoices bearing the name of the City and the project identification number. These invoices must be retained by the purchasing contractor for a period of five (5) years.



13.15.6 Contractors must file a sales tax return for all excess re-saleable materials and supplies that are not returned to the supplier. This return must be filed and paid not later than the due date of the contractor's sales tax return following the month in which the contractor determines that the materials were not used in the project. 13.15.7 An exempt organization that fails to revise the project exemption certificate expiration date as necessary to complete any work required by the contract will be liable for any sales tax due as determined by an audit of the contractor. 13.16 TESTING 13.16.1 Materials Testing and Inspection Service: City may employ and pay for a qualified independent materials and geotechnical testing laboratory to perform testing and inspection service during construction operations. Contractor to coordinate all work. 13.16.2 The Contractor shall bear all costs of any inspections, tests, or approvals required under any laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction. 13.16.3 The City will provide any special inspection and testing services to verify the Work is performed in accordance with the Contract. The City will provide the Contractor with a listing of tests to be performed and approximate location or frequency. The Contractor will be required to notify the City forty-eight (48) hours prior to the time the Contractor will be ready for specific tests required by the City. If such special inspection or testing reveals failure of the Work to comply (1) with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or (2) with respect to the performance of the Work, with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall bear the cost of the City’s inspection and re-testing and such cost shall be deducted then or thereafter due Contractor. In all other cases, the City shall bear such costs. 13.17 SEWER SPECIFICATIONS 13.17.1 The Metropolitan St. Louis Sewer District Specifications (MSD Specifications), shall govern the Project, unless otherwise superseded by the Technical Specifications and Job Special Provisions. 13.18 CONTROL OF MATERIAL 13.18.1 All tickets will be collected to verify the quantity of each item in their original form only. Photocopies or facsimiles will not be accepted. All tickets shall be submitted on the day of delivery, either to the City personnel or the Parks and Recreation office or they will not be accepted for payment. 13.18.2 Contractors and subcontractors will be required to produce letters of certification or certified test reports from material producers and suppliers in order to determine compliance with specifications for designated materials prior to the incorporation thereof into the work. 13.18.3 The City will determine which materials are to be tested. The form and content of these test reports shall be in accordance with recognized standards and practices for this work or as otherwise determined by the City. 13.18.4 No direct payment will be made for this work.



13.19 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES 13.19.1 Unless otherwise directed within the Technical Specifications, the quantities for which payment will be made will be those shown in the Agreement for the various items, provided the Project is constructed essentially to the lines and grades shown on the plans. Contract quantities will be used for final payment except when: a) Errors are formed in the original computations in excess of 15% of the contract

quantities. b) An original cross section is found to have an average deviation from the true

elevation in excess of one foot. c) An authorized change in grade, slope or typical section is made. d) Unauthorized deviations decrease the quantities on the plans. When the above conditions are encountered, the correction or revisions will be computed and added to or deducted from the contract quantity. 13.19.2 When the plans have been altered or when disagreement exists between the Contractor and the City as to the accuracy of the plan quantities of any balance, or the entire project, either party shall have the right to request a re-computation of contract quantities within any area, by hand calculation of the average-end-area method for cubic yard quantities, and standard measurement methods for other quantities, by written notice to the other party. The written notice shall contain evidence that an error exists in the original groundline elevation or in the original computations which will affect the final payment quantity in excess of 15%. When such final measurement is required, it will be made from the latest available ground surface and the design section. 13.19.3 These specifications require that the Contractor must furnish the representative of the City, on the job site, with original weight certificates on a daily basis signed by a bonded weighmaster for all materials supplied by the Contractor that are incorporated into this work, which payment therefore is based on weight. 13.20 WORKMANSHIP 13.20.1 The Contractor shall at all times employ sufficient labor and equipment for prosecuting the work to full completion in the manner and time required by these specifications. All workmen shall have sufficient skill and experience to perform properly the work assigned to them. 13.20.2 The labor provided by the Contractor shall be directed to be of a workmanlike character with respect to the methods of construction and quality of completed work; and, shall not encumber the premises or adjacent property or streets with materials and/or equipment. 13.20.3 "Removal" shall be defined as removal and disposal off the site unless otherwise specified or directed by the engineer.



ARTICLE 14

EQUAL OPPORTUNITY AND NON-DISCRIMINATION 14.1 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY 14.1.1 The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it after award and prior to completion of the Work, will not discriminate on the basis of race, age, color, religion, sex, national origin or disability in the selection and retention of subcontractors. The contractor will comply with Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as the same has been or may be amended from time to time. In all solicitation either by competitive bidding or negotiations made by the contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurement of materials or equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified of the contractor’s obligations under this contract and the regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the ground of race, color, age, religion, sex, national origin or disability. 14.1.2 The contractor will take action to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, age, color, religion, sex, national origin or disability. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation, and selection for training including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post notices pertaining to the foregoing in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. 14.1.3 The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, age, religion, sex, national origin or disability. 14.1.4 The contractor will comply with all provisions of federal, state and local codes, ordinances and regulations governing the regulation of Equal Employment Opportunity and Non-Discrimination. 14.2 NON-DISCRIMINATION 14.2.1 During performance of the obligations set forth in this Agreement, Contractor agrees that it shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment in the terms or conditions of employment including but not limited to: recruitment, selection, training, upgrading, promotion, demotion, transfer, layoff, or termination due to said person’s race, religion, creed, color, sex, age, national origin, handicap, or disability. 14.3 GENERAL 14.3.1 In the event that any or all of the provision(s) of the foregoing paragraphs conflict with federal, state or other local laws, ordinances or regulations, then the requirements of such federal, state or local laws, ordinances, or regulations shall prevail. Compliance with the foregoing provisions shall not relieve the contractor from adherence to any and all additional requirements regarding equal employment or non-discrimination set forth in such federal, state or other local laws, ordinances or regulations.



ARTICLE 15

CONFLICTS OF INTEREST

15.1.1 The parties agree to abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations relating to conflicts of interest.

ARTICLE 16

ALIEN REGISTRATION, COMPLIANCE AND ENFORCEMENT

16.1 DEFINITIONS

16.1.1 "Business entity", any person or group of persons performing or engaging in any activity, enterprise, profession, or occupation for gain, benefit, advantage, or livelihood. The term "business entity" shall include but not be limited to self-employed individuals, partnerships, corporations, contractors, and subcontractors. The term "business entity" shall include any business entity that possesses a business permit, license, or tax certificate issued by the state, any business entity that is exempt by law from obtaining such a business permit, and any business entity that is operating unlawfully without such a business permit. The term "business entity" shall not include a self-employed individual with no employees or entities utilizing the services of direct sellers as defined in subdivision (17) of subsection 12 of section 288.034, RSMo;

16.1.2 "Contractor", a person, employer, or business entity that enters into an agreement to

perform any service or work or to provide a certain product in exchange for valuable consideration. This definition shall include but not be limited to a general contractor, subcontractor, independent contractor, contract employee, project manager, or a recruiting or staffing entity;

16.1.3 "Employee", any person performing work or service of any kind or character for hire

within the state of Missouri; 16.1.4 "Employer", any person or entity employing any person for hire within the state of

Missouri, including a public employer. Where there are two or more putative employers, any person or entity taking a business tax deduction for the employee in question shall be considered an employer of that person for purposes of this section;

16.1.5 "Employment", the act of employing or state of being employed, engaged, or hired to

perform work or service of any kind or character within the state of Missouri; 16.1.6 "Federal work authorization program", any of the electronic verification of work

authorization programs operated by the United States Department of Homeland Security or an equivalent federal work authorization program operated by the United States Department of Homeland Security to verify information of newly hired employees, under the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 (IRCA), P.L.99-603;

16.1.7 "Knowingly", a person acts knowingly or with knowledge,



(a) With respect to the person's conduct or to attendant circumstances when the person is aware of the nature of the person's conduct or that those circumstances exist; or (b) With respect to a result of the person's conduct when the person is aware that the person's conduct is practically certain to cause that result;

16.1.8 "Municipality", the City of Brentwood, Missouri. 16.1.9 "Public employer", every department, agency, or instrumentality of the state of

Missouri or any political subdivision of the state of Missouri; 16.1.10 "Unauthorized alien", an alien who does not have the legal right or authorization

under federal law to work in the United States, as defined in 8 U.S.C. 1324a(h)(3); 16.1.11 "Work", any job, task, employment, labor, personal services, or any other activity for

which compensation is provided, expected or due, including but not limited to all activities conducted by business entities.

16.2 ILLEGAL ACTS

16.2.1 No business entity or employer may knowingly employ, hire for employment, or

continue to employ an unauthorized alien to perform work within the municipality. 16.2.2. Accordingly, if the amount to be paid pursuant to this contract or grant exceeds five

thousand dollars by the municipality the contracting or grant recipient business entity shall, as a condition of the award of contract or grant, by sworn affidavit and provision of documentation, affirm its enrollment and participation in a federal work authorization program with respect to the employees working in connection with the contracted services. Every such business entity shall also sign an affidavit affirming that it does not knowingly employ any person who is an unauthorized alien in connection with the contracted services. No such business entity or employer shall violate subsection 16.2.1 of this section.

16.2.3 The affidavit shall be approved as to form by the municipal attorney. 16.2.4 An employer may enroll and participate in a federal work authorization program and

shall verify the employment eligibility of every employee in the employer's hire whose employment commences after the employer enrolls in a federal work authorization program. The employer shall retain a copy of the dated verification report received from the federal government. Any business entity that participates in such program shall have an affirmative defense that such business entity has not violated subsection 16.2.1 of this section.

16.2.5 A general contractor or subcontractor of any tier shall not be liable under subsection

16.2.1 of this section when such general contractor or subcontractor contracts with its direct subcontractor who violates subsection 16.2.1 of this section, if the contract binding the contractor and subcontractor affirmatively states that the direct subcontractor is not knowingly in violation of subsection 16.2.1 of this section and shall not henceforth be in such violation and the contractor or subcontractor receives a sworn affidavit under the penalty of perjury attesting to the fact that the direct subcontractor's employees are lawfully present in the United States.

16.2.6 The determination of whether a worker is an unauthorized alien shall be made by the

federal government. A determination of such status of an individual by the federal government



shall create a rebuttable presumption as to that individual's status in any judicial proceedings brought under this section.

ARTICLE 17

SAFETY PROGRAMS, COMPLIANCE AND PENALTIES

17.1 DEFINITIONS 17.1.1 "Construction", construction, reconstruction, demolition, painting and decorating, or

major repair; 17.1.2 "Department", the Missouri department of labor and industrial relations; 17.1.3 "Person", any natural person, joint venture, partnership, corporation, or other business

or legal entity; 17.1.4 "Municipality", the City of Brentwood, Missouri; 17.1.5 "Public works", all fixed works constructed for public use or benefit or paid for wholly

or in part out of public funds.

17.2 OSHA 17.2.1 Contractor shall provide a ten (10) hour Occupational Safety and Health

Administration (OSHA) construction safety program for all employees who will be on-site at the Project. The construction safety program shall include a course in construction safety and health that is approved by OSHA or a similar program approved by the Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations which is at least as stringent as an approved OSHA program as required by Section 292.675, RSMo.

17.2.2 Contractor shall require its on-site employees to complete a construction safety

program within sixty (60) days after the date work on the Project commences. 17.2.3 Contractor acknowledges and agrees that any of Contractor’s employees found on

the Project site without documentation of the successful completion of a construction safety program shall be required to produce such documentation within twenty (20) days, or will be subject to removal from the Project.

17.2.4 Contractor shall require all of its Subcontractors to comply with the requirements of

this Section and Section 292.675, RSMo. 17.2.5 Pursuant to Section 292.675, RSMo, Contractor shall forfeit to City as a penalty two

thousand five hundred dollars ($2,500.00), plus one hundred dollars ($100.00) for each on-site employee employed by Contractor or its Subcontractor, for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such on-site employee is employed without the construction safety training required in Sec 17.2.1.

17.2.6 The penalty described in Section in 17.2.5 shall not begin to accrue until the time

periods described in 17.2.2 and 17.2.3 above has elapsed.



17.2.7 Violations of 17.2.1 above and imposition of the penalty described in this section shall

be investigated and determined by the Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations. 17.2.8 In the event that the Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations has

determined that a violation of Section 292.675, RSMo, has occurred and that a penalty as described in 17.2.5 shall be assessed, the City shall withhold and retain all sums and amounts due and owing when making payments to Contractor under this Contract.

17.3 DOCUMENTATION

17.3.1 Any employee found on a worksite subject to this section without documentation of the

successful completion of the course required under subsection 17.2.1 of this Article shall be afforded twenty days to produce such documentation before being subject to removal from the project.

17.4 PENALTIES

17.4.1 The contractor to whom the contract is awarded and any subcontractor under such

contractor shall require all on-site employees to complete the ten-hour training program required under subsection 2 of this section. The contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the municipality, two thousand five hundred dollars plus one hundred dollars for each employee employed by the contractor or subcontractor, for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such employee is employed without the required training. The penalty shall not begin to accrue until the time period in subsections 2 and 3 of this section have elapsed. The municipality shall withhold and retain therefrom, all sums and amounts due and owing as a result of any violation of this section when making payments to the contractor under the contract. The contractor may withhold from any subcontractor, sufficient sums to cover any penalties the public body has withheld from the contractor resulting from the subcontractor's failure to comply with the terms of this section. If the payment has been made to the subcontractor without withholding, the contractor may recover the amount of the penalty resulting from the fault of the subcontractor.

17.5 INVESTIGATION

17.5.1 In determining whether a violation of this section has occurred, and whether the

penalty under subsection 4 of this section shall be imposed, the department shall investigate any claim of violation. Upon completing such investigation, the department shall notify the municipality and any party found to be in violation of this section of its findings and whether a penalty shall be assessed. Determinations under this section may be appealed in the Circuit Court of St. Louis County.

17.6 ENFORCEMENT

17.6.1 If the contractor or subcontractor fails to pay the penalty within forty-five days

following notification by the department, the department shall pursue an enforcement action to enforce the monetary penalty provisions of subsection 4 of this section against the contractor or subcontractor found to be in violation of this section. If the court orders payment of the penalties as prescribed under subsection 4 of this section, the department shall be entitled to recover its actual cost of enforcement in addition to such penalty amount.


Contractor’s Affidavit for Public Construction Projects GC-25

Contractor shall execute and comply with the conditions substantially as stated in the following affidavit: STATE OF MISSOURI ) ) ss COUNTY OF __________ )

CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT FOR PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS

The undersigned, being duly sworn, does state and depose as follows:

1. I am the _____________(title) of ________________________(company) which is a contractor on the ____________________________ Project, and authorized to sign this Affidavit on the Company’s behalf. 2. I have verified the information set forth in this Affidavit for the Contractor. If any subcontractors have been retained on the Project, I have also verified the information as to any subcontractor. 3. The Contractor and its subcontractors have Workers’ Compensation Insurance that covers its employees working on the Project and such insurance meets or exceeds the requirements established by law. 4. The Contractor and its subcontractors have verified the U.S. citizenship or lawful status of all workers employed on the Project and do not knowingly employ any person who is an unauthorized alien in connection with the contracted services.

5. The Contractor and its subcontractors have been informed by the City of the requirements to pay prevailing wage and will pay the prevailing wages to all workers employed on the Project as established by the applicable Annual Wage Order for the County where the Project occurs.

6. The Contractor and its subcontractors are in compliance with federal law

requiring an accredited apprenticeship program, if applicable. 7. The Contractor and its subcontractors are enrolled and participate in a federal

work authorization program with respect to employees working in connection with the contracted services. Further Affiant sayeth naught. __________________________________ Authorized Officer of Contractor

Subscribed and sworn to before me this ____ day of ____________, 20___. __________________________________ Notary Public

My commission expires:__________


Contractor’s Affidavit for Public Construction Projects GC-26



SUMMARY Page - 1

SECTION 011000 – SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Purchase contracts. 4. Access to site. 5. Coordination with occupants. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Specification and Drawing conventions. 8. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: City of Brentwood Fire House ADA Upgrades

1. Project Location: 8756 Eulalie Ave, Brentwood, MO 63144

B. Owner: City of Brentwood, MO, 2348 South Brentwood Boulevard, Brentwood, Missouri 63144

1. Owner's Representative: Terry Kurten, Fire Chief

C. Engineer: Horner & Shifrin, Inc., 401 South 18th Street, Suite 400, St. Louis, MO 63103

1. Engineer’s Representative: Dave Lauver, P.E., Project Manager

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. ADA Upgrades to two kitchens.

2. Modifications to existing Grab Bars


SUMMARY Page - 2

3. Modifications to existing bathrooms for ADA compliance

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to Work in areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises

clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or for storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weather tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

D. Condition of Existing Grounds: Maintain portions of existing grounds, landscaping, and hardscaping affected by construction operations throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.


SUMMARY Page - 3

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

E. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the existing building and on Project site is not permitted.

F. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing

Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



SUMMARY Page - 4

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY


SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page - 1

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in Project Manual. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific



features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and

addresses as well as names and addresses of Engineers and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated.

l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Engineer’s Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Engineer will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Engineer’s Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.



1. Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.





CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Page - 1

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Engineer will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Engineer will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Engineer are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 10 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Engineer.


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Page - 2

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Engineer.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Engineer.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, Engineer will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Engineer may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714 Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.





PAYMENT PROCEDURES

Page - 1

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for

handling changes to the Contract. 2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements

governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Engineer at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Engineer. c. Engineer's Project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.


PAYMENT PROCEDURES

Page - 2

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form, with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. Round dollar amounts to whole dollars, with total equal to Contract Sum.

1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated

and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

6. Overhead Costs: Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each line item.

7. Schedule of Values Revisions: Revise the schedule of values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. Include at least one separate line item for each Change Order and Construction Change Directive.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Engineer and paid for by Owner.

B. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Engineer by the 25th of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Engineer will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.


PAYMENT PROCEDURES

Page - 3

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

5. Provide proof of compliance with prevailing wage law with each application for payment.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Engineer by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from

every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.

H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).


PAYMENT PROCEDURES

Page - 4

4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Sustainable design action plans, including preliminary project materials cost data. 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 8. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 9. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 10. Copies of building permits. 11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance

of the Work. 12. Initial progress report. 13. Report of preconstruction conference.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Engineer issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706. 5. AIA Document G706A. 6. AIA Document G707.





SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Submittal schedule requirements. 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.


1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting closeout submittals and maintenance material submittals.

3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

5. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Engineer’s responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Engineer’s responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Engineer and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.



1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal Category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Engineer’s final release or approval. g. Scheduled dates for purchasing. h. Scheduled date of fabrication. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL FORMATS

A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal:

1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Engineer. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 6. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 7. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section

number with sequential alphanumeric identifier; and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals. 8. Category and type of submittal. 9. Submittal purpose and description. 10. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for

each of multiple items. 11. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 12. Indication of full or partial submittal. 13. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 14. Other necessary identification. 15. Remarks. 16. Signature of transmitter.

B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Engineer.

C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Engineer on



previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet.

D. PDF Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, incorporating complete information into each PDF file. Name PDF file with submittal number.

E. Submittals for Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals as PDF files, or other format indicated by Project software website.

1.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Email: Prepare submittals as PDF package, and transmit to Engineer by sending via email. Include PDF transmittal form. Include information in email subject line as requested by Engineer.

a. Engineer will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as a digital Project Record Document file.

2. Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Engineer’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal.



D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer’s action

stamp.

E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Engineer’s action stamp.

1.7 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. d. Testing by recognized testing agency. e. Application of testing agency labels and seals. f. Notation of coordination requirements. g. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples.

B. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space.



C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of Engineers and owners, and other information specified.

D. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal.

E. Certificates:

1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated.

2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Test and Research Reports:

1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:



a. Name of evaluation organization. b. Date of evaluation. c. Time period when report is in effect. d. Product and manufacturers' names. e. Description of product. f. Test procedures and results. g. Limitations of use.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Engineer.

B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with a uniform approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

1. Engineer will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's review and approval.

1.9 ENGINEER’S REVIEW

A. Action Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it.

1. PDF Submittals: Engineer will indicate, via markup on each submittal, the appropriate action.

B. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

C. Engineer will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Engineer without action.





QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page - 1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual work results are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Architect, Owner or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).



D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

H. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

I. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for direction before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:



1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.

2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

F. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified.

G. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's Construction Schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including Subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. Distinguish source quality-control tests and inspections from field quality-control tests and inspections.



2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the Statement of Special Inspections.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspection. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:



1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.



1.9 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

3. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

4. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

B. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project

site.

F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections, staging areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for commencement of the Work, submit schedule indicating implementation and termination dates of each temporary utility.

C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Show fabrication and installation details, including plans, elevations, details, layouts, typestyles, graphic elements, and message content.



D. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.

E. Moisture- and Mold-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage and mold.

F. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste-handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the United States Access Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts[, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails] [, with galvanized barbed-wire top strand].

B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide [concrete] [galvanized-steel] bases for supporting posts.



C. Fencing Windscreen Privacy Screen: Polyester fabric scrim with grommets for attachment to chain link fence, sized to height of fence, in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

D. Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, [6 feet (1.8 m)] [8 feet (2.4 m)] high, framed with four 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) rails, with preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart.

E. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

F. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-Off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (914 by 1524 mm).

G. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Owner will provide interior space for field offices for duration of Project.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."



C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL

A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Toilets: Use of Owner's designated existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

D. Temporary Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

1. Provide temporary dehumidification systems when required to reduce ambient and substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes



and their proper curing or drying. Permanent HVAC system may not be used for this purpose.

E. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas.

1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed.

a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas.

b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.

2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices.

3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment.

F. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.

H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install WiFi cell phone access equipment for each field office.

1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:



1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E136. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Engineer schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touch up signs so they are legible at all times.

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."

F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

G. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life.

1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect

elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

H. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.



3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

1. Where access to adjacent properties is required in order to affect protection of existing facilities, obtain written permission from adjacent property owner to access property for that purpose.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

C. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

E. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side.

2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood.

a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48 inches (1219 mm) between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in vestibule.

3. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.

4. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 5. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security

locks where openings are required. 6. Protect air-handling equipment. 7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

G. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.



1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Comply with additional limits on smoking specified in other Sections.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.6 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe delivery, handling, storage, installation, and protection provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage.

1. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.

2. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.

3. Indicate methods to be used to avoid trapping water in finished work.

B. Controlled Construction Period: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use temporary or permanent HVAC system to control humidity within ranges specified for

installed and stored materials. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and

exposure to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 24 hours are considered defective and require replacing.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove and replace materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.



1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

Page - 1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 2. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Architect through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section, provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that



Page - 2

does meet the requirements of the specifications. Submit a comparable product request, if applicable.


A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 10 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Architect's Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.

1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the following:

a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed.



Page - 3

e. Ratings.

3. See individual identification sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 for additional identification requirements.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.



Page - 4

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

a. Submit additional documentation required by Architect in order to establish equivalency of proposed products. Evaluation of "or equal" product status is by the Architect, whose determination is final.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: …"

2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: …"



Page - 5

3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: …"

4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, which complies with requirements.

a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …"

5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: …"

6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements.

a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …"

7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for substitutions for convenience.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with



Page - 6

requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements.

2. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 3. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 4. Samples, if requested.

B. Submittal Requirements: Approval by the Architect of Contractor's request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with specified submittal requirements.




EXECUTION Page - 1

SECTION 017300 – EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project

Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, replacing defective work, and final cleaning.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of subsequent work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of subsequent work.


A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements.


EXECUTION Page - 2

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Plumbing piping systems. f. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. g. Control systems. h. Communication systems. i. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. j. Conveying systems. k. Electrical wiring systems. l. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.


EXECUTION Page - 3

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design requirements.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

B. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.


EXECUTION Page - 4

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise levels.


EXECUTION Page - 5

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work.

1. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and replacing defective Work.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to [minimize] [prevent] interruption to occupied areas.


EXECUTION Page - 6

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.


EXECUTION Page - 7

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

I. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."


EXECUTION Page - 8

B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Page - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for additional operation and

maintenance manual requirements. 2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements to train the Owner's

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain products, equipment, and systems.


A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at final completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.



1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Owner's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records. 6. Submit sustainable design submittals not previously submitted. 7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders.



8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

9. Complete final cleaning requirements. 10. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate

visual defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. 5. Submit final completion photographic documentation.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:



a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

D. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

E. Warranties in Paper Form:

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

F. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.



1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

f. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. g. Remove labels that are not permanent. h. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

i. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system. Provide written report on completion of cleaning.

j. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. k. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.



B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



OPERATION AND MAITENANCE DATA

Page - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory manuals. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Systems and equipment operation manuals. 4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 5. Product maintenance manuals.


1. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating operation and maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple contracts.

2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for verification and compilation of data into operation and maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Engineer will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance submittals is acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.



Page - 2

B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Engineer. Enable reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Submit three paper copies. Engineer.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Engineer will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Engineer will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Engineer's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Engineer's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

E. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.

1.5 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

B. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard-copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, post-type binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.



Page - 3

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

1.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Engineer. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Engineer that designed the

systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.



Page - 4

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY MANUAL

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. List items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include the following:

1. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

2. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

3. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

1.8 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

E. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.



Page - 5

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

1.9 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS

A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operating procedures.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

C. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.



Page - 6

9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for identification.

1.10 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below.

C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:



Page - 7

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

I. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

J. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals.

1.11 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

C. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.



Page - 8

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.





PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Page - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating project record documents covering the Work of multiple contracts.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 4. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints. 2) Submit record digital data files and one set(s) of plots. 3) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints. 2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

B. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.



C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:



1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 4. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 5. Architect will furnish Contractor with one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings

for use in recording information.

a. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files.

b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

1.5 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.

C. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file and paper copy.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.



1.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file and paper copy.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Page - 1

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Instruction in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Demonstration and training video recordings.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

C. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module.

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Engineer. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Date of video recording.



2. Transcript: Prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

3. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

4. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared in same paper and PDF file format required for operation and maintenance manuals specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required.

D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather

conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data have been reviewed and approved by Engineer.



1.7 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Systems and equipment operation manuals. c. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. d. Product maintenance manuals. e. Project Record Documents. f. Identification systems. g. Warranties and bonds. h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.



k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning. e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

1.8 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

1.9 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.



1. Engineer will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

1.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.

B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video in MPEG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor resolution of 12 megapixels and capable of recording in full HD mode with vibration reduction technology.

1. Submit video recordings on CD-ROM or thumb drive. 2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to Project Manual

table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu. 3. File Names: Utilize file names based on name of equipment generally described in video

segment, as identified in Project specifications. 4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for

inclusion on the equipment demonstration and training recording that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project Manual table of contents:

a. Name of Contractor/Installer. b. Business address. c. Business phone number. d. Point of contact. e. Email address.

C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.

1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment.



b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project Manual table of contents.

c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes, stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment.

D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.

1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.

F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.

G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION



ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Page - 1

SECTION 06 41 00 - ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.

B. Hardware.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.

B. Section 12 36 00 - Countertops.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2016).

B. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1; 2016, with Errata (2017).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories.

1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot, minimum.

2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).

C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.

D. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.

1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect units from moisture damage.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.

http://www.awinet.org/

http://www.naaws-committee.com/



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN INTENT IS TO MATCH THE EXISTING CABINETS. INFORMATION IN THIS SPECIFICATION MAY VARY TO MATCH THE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION, APPEARANCE, FINISHES, COLOR AND HARDWARE.

2.02 CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.

B. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.

C. Cabinets:

1. Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Decorative laminate.

2. Finish - Exposed Interior Surfaces: Wood.

3. Casework Construction Type: Type B - Face-frame.

4. Grained Face Layout for Cabinet and Door Fronts: Flush panel.

a. Custom Grade: Doors, drawer fronts and false fronts wood grain to run and match vertically within each cabinet unit.

5. Adjustable Shelf Loading: 50 lbs. per sq. ft.

6. Drawer Side Construction: Multiple-dovetailed.

2.03 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS

A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

B. Use wood type as indicated on the Finish Schedule, finish per Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating.

2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Match Existing.

B. Provide specific types as indicated.

1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, through color, _____ color, finish as indicated.

2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, through color, _____ color, finish as indicated.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, flat shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width to match component thickness.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2. Use at all exposed plywood edges.

3. Use at all exposed shelf edges.

B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.

C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish in exposed locations.

D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.

E. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface.



2.06 HARDWARE

A. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments.

B. Drawer and Door Pulls: Match the Existing.

C. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with satin finish.

D. Catches: Magnetic.

E. Drawer Slides:

1. Type: Full extension with overtravel.

2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade.

3. Mounting: Side mounted.

4. Stops: Integral type.

5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.

F. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with polished finish.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Match Existing.

2.07 FABRICATION

A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings.

B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length.

C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.

D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.

1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.

2. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with plastic trim.

E. Matching Wood Grain: Comply with requirements of quality standard for specified Grade and as follows:

F. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal cut edges.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.

B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.

C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.

D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.

E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.



F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.

END OF SECTION


ROUGH CARPENTRY Page - 1

SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Structural dimension lumber framing.

B. Non-structural dimension lumber framing.

C. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.

D. Fire retardant treated wood materials.

E. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.

F. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.


A. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.


A. AWC (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings; 2015.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a.

C. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2013.

D. ASTM D2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing; 2010 (Reapproved 2017).

E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018b.

F. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2017.

G. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.

H. PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; 2010.

I. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2015.

J. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; 2014.


A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation.

B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.

1. Species: Southern Pine, unless otherwise indicated.

2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements.



3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.

4. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.

B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc; SPIB (GR).

B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.

C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.

D. Stud Framing (2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ):

1. Species: Any allowed under referenced grading rules.

2. Grade: No. 2.

E. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:

1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.

2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing.

3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry.

2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications.

1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements.

B. Fire Retardant Treatment:

1. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes.

a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood.

b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated .

c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become wet.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.

B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.



C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.

3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength.

B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.

D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and 1 Wood Frame Construction Manual.

3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking.

C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.

D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated.

E. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking:

1. Grab bars.

2. Towel and bath accessories.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

1. Comply with applicable regulations.

2. Do not burn scrap on project site.

3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.

4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.

B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.

C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

END OF SECTION

This page intentionally left blank


THERMAL INSULATION Page - 1

SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall construction.


A. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2018.

B. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2017.

C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018b.

D. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2016a.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques.


A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.

2.02 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit.

1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing, if any.

4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.

5. Manufacturers:

a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle.

b. Johns Manville: www.jm.com/#sle.

c. Knauf Insulation GmbH: www.knaufinsulation.us.

d. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C578


https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E84

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E136






THERMAL INSULATION Page - 2

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Tape: Reinforced polyethylene film with acrylic pressure sensitive adhesive.

1. Application: Sealing of interior circular penetrations, such as pipes or cables.

2. Width: Are required for application.

B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation.

B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond.

3.02 BATT INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.

C. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation.

D. Staple or nail facing flanges in place at maximum 6 inches on center.

E. Retain insulation batts in place with spindle fasteners at 12 inches on center.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.

END OF SECTION


GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page - 1

SECTION 09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.

B. Metal stud wall framing.

C. Metal channel ceiling framing.

D. Acoustic insulation.

E. Cementitious backing board.

F. Gypsum wallboard.

G. Joint treatment and accessories.


A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.

B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing acoustical gaps in construction other than gypsum board or plaster work.


A. AISI S100-12 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2012.

B. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016).

C. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2016).

D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2018.

E. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2015.

F. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014, with Editorial Revision (2015).

G. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2017.

H. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2017.

I. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2017a.

J. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2015.

K. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2016.

L. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2014a.

M. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2013.

http://www.steel.org/

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A108/A118/A136


https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A653/A653M

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C475/C475M











N. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Exterior Gypsum Panel Products for Use as Sheathing; 2013a.

O. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer Units; 2017a.

P. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2017.

Q. ASTM C1658/C1658M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels; 2013.

R. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2016.

S. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009 (Reapproved 2016).

T. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2016.

U. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products; 2016.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements.

D. Test Reports: For stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or ASTM C754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and finishing, with minimum three years of experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.

1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements.

B. Interior Partitions, Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:

1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.

2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:

1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.

2. Marino: www.marinoware.com.

3. Phillips Manufacturing Co: www.phillipsmfg.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Loadbearing Studs for Application of Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 05 40 00.





http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D3273



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=GA%20216




http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=GA%20216





C. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/120 at 5 psf.

1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.

2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.

3. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped.

4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.

5. Resilient Furring Channels: Single or double leg configuration; 1/2 inch channel depth.

D. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.

E. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition.

1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12.

2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating.

3. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems indicated on drawings.

4. Deflection Track:

a. Provide mechanical anchorage devices as described above that accommodate deflection while maintaining the fire-rating of the wall assembly.

b. Products:

1) Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

5. Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing indicated on drawings; minimum track length of 12 feet.

F. Gypsum Board Ceiling Suspension System: Steel grid system of main tees and support bars connected to structure using hanging wire.

1. Products:

a. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System: www.usg.com/#sle.

b. or equal.

2.03 BOARD MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:

1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.

2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.

3. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.

4. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.

1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Glass mat faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M, suitable for paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board.

3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.

a. Mold-resistant board is required whenever board is being installed before the building is enclosed and conditioned.

4. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.

5. At Assemblies Indicated with Lead Lining: 5/8 inch type X fire code gypsum meeting classification ASTM C 36, with pure lead sheet meeting federal specification QQ-L-201 F, Grade C. Lead to be laminate on the back side of the board, with lead strips overlapping the seams. Lead Discs to be place over the head of screws.




http://www.steel.org/

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A653/A653M



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D3273



6. Thickness:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.

b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.

7. Paper-Faced Products:

a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock.

8. Mold-Resistant Paper-Faced Products: For use in high humidity locations and as indicated on the drawings.

9. Glass Mat Faced Products:

a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus.

b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus Fireguard C.

C. Backing Board For Wet Areas:

1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds and behind tile installation.

2. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325.

a. Thickness: 1/2 inch.

b. Products:

1) USG Corporation: www.usg.com.

D. Ceiling Board: Special sag resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.

1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

3. Edges: Tapered.

4. Products:

a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Span 24 Ceiling Board.

2.04 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES

A. Water-Resistive Barrier: [See section 07 26 50].

B. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.

1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.

2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional corner bead and control joints, provide U-bead at exposed panel edges.

3. Products:

a. Same manufacturer as framing materials.

C. Beads, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: ASTM C1047, rigid plastic, galvanized steel, or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.

1. Corner Beads: Low profile, for 90 degree outside corners.

a. Products:

1) CertainTeed Corporation; No-Coat Drywall Corner: www.certainteed.com/#sle.

2) ClarkDietrich; Strait-Flex Big-Stick: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle.

3) Phillips Manufacturing Co; Everlast Corner Bead: www.phillipsmfg.com/#sle.

2. L-Trim with Tear-Away Strip: Sized to fit 5/8 inch thick gypsum wallboard.

a. Products:

1) Phillips Manufacturing Co; gripSTIK L-Tear: www.phillipsmfg.com/#sle.

D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions.

1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated.

2. Paper Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated.

3. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.



http://www.usg.com/







4. Chemical hardening type compound.

E. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inch in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion resistant.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.

3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.

1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.

2. Laterally brace entire suspension system.

3. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift.

C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center.

1. Extend partition framing to structure in all locations.

2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud connections; do not leave studs unattached to track.

D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs.

E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center.

1. Orientation: Horizontal.

2. Spacing: As indicated.

F. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of:

1. Framed openings.

2. Wall mounted cabinets.

3. Plumbing fixtures.

4. Toilet accessories.

5. Wall mounted door hardware.

3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.

B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.and where indicated on the partition types.

1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members.

2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.

3. Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes, except where firestopping is provided.





3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations.

B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.

1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing.

C. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.

D. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board except face layer of non-rated double-layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination.

E. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with sealant.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.

B. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

3.06 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint tape, embed and finish with setting type joint compound.

B. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.

C. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:

1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas specifically indicated.

2. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish.

4. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction.

D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes.

1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.

2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile.

E. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer.

3.07 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.

END OF SECTION




TILING Page - 1

SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Tile for floor applications.

B. Tile for wall applications.

C. Non-ceramic trim.


A. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between tile work and adjacent construction and fixtures.

B. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Tile backer board.


A. ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2013.1.

1. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2014.

2. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

3. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

4. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2009 (Revised).

5. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

6. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

7. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

8. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

9. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

10. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016).

11. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

12. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2005 (Reaffirmed 2010).

13. ANSI A108.19 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Gauged Porcelain Tiles and Gauged Porcelain Tile Panels/Slabs by the Thin-Bed Method Bonded with Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar or Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2017.













https://www.tcnatile.com/products-and-services/publications/218-english-publications/227-ansi-a137-3-and-a108-19.html


TILING Page - 2

14. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2013 (Revised).

15. ANSI A118.11 - American National Standard Specifications for EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

16. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2012.

B. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2017.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details.

D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 by 18 inches in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications:

1. Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of five years of documented experience.


A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.

B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TILE

A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.

1. Design intent is to match the existing. Owner has a few pieces of attic stock that may be used to replace the existing. The new construction shall buy new material noted below.

a. Manufacturer Crossville; Empire Series, Color: US79 E. Night.

1) 12" x 24" floor tile.

2) 12" x 12" wall tile.

3) Grout color to match the existing.

4) Floor to wall joint: Square grout joint.



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A137.1

http://www.tcnatile.com/products-and-services/publications.html


TILING Page - 3

2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Non-Ceramic Trim: Finish, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive.

1. Applications:

a. Open edges of wall tile.

b. Open edges of floor tile.

c. Wall corners, outside and inside.

d. Transition between floor finishes of different heights.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com/#sle.

b. or equal.

2.03 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle.

2. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com/#sle.

3. or equal.

2.04 ADHESIVE MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Laticrete; Product 254 Platinum: www.laticrete.com

2. Mapei Corporation; Product Kerabond/Keralstic System: www.mapei.com.

3. TEC; Product Full Flex Mortar or Ultimate Large Tile Mortar, depending on the size of tile being used: www.tecspecialty.com.


B. Manufacturers:

1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com.

2. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com.

3. Epoxy: ANSI A118.3.

2.05 GROUTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Mapei Corporation; Product as listed below for differing applications.

a. Kerapoxy CQ - for all grout except expansion/control joints - colors as indicated on the drawings.

b. or equal from other manufacturers of adhesives.


2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Waterproofing and crack isolation membrane.

1. Laticrete, Product Hydroban waterproofing.

2. TEC, Product HydraFlex Waterproofing Crack Isolation Membrane.

3. Mapei Corporation; Product Mapelastic Aquadefense.


a. Install under all floor tile and up wall 4" inches.

b. Install under wall tile is shower areas.


TILING Page - 4

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.

C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces.

D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.

E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect surrounding work from damage.

B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.

C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances.

D. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry-set mortar to a feather edge.

E. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a through ANSI A108.19 , manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

C. Where substrate contains an control or expansion joint, locate joint in tiling as close as possible to that joint.

D. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints.

E. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.

F. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.

G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

H. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.

I. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use waterproof and stain resistant grout.

J. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.

3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS

A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113, dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use waterproofing and crack isolation membrane under all ceramic tile installations.







TILING Page - 5

3.05 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLS

A. At tiled shower receptors install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method B414, mortar bed floor, and W201, mortar bed over concrete or masonry walls.

B. Grout with waterproof and stain resistant grout.

3.06 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE

A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244, using membrane at toilet rooms.

B. Over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W245.

C. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W202, thin-set with dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

END OF SECTION






SIGNAGE Page - 1

SECTION 10 14 00 - SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Room and door signs.


A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.

B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.

C. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.

C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors.

1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on drawings, include the drawing room number on schedule.

2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule.

3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project, illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment.

E. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or chips.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.


A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.

B. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.


A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer.

B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.

http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys/granule/CFR-2012-title36-vol3/CFR-2012-title36-vol3-part1191

http://www.ada.gov/

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&item_s_key=00006864&item_key_date=901231&input_doc_number=ICC&input_doc_title=


SIGNAGE Page - 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Flat Signs:

1. APCO Midwest (St. Louis): www.apcosigns.com

2. Cosco Industries (ADA signs); ADA Series 1: www.coscoarchitecturalsigns.com/#sle.

3. FASTSIGNS: www.fastsigns.com/#sle.

4. or equal.

2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.

B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every toilet room doorway. All other rooms do not require signage.

1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified.

2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille.

3. Character Height: 1 inch.

4. Sign Height: 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "UNISEX", ADA Restroom and braille.

2.03 SIGN TYPES

A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame.

1. Edges: Square.

2. Corners: Square.

3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive.

B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:

1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font.

2. Character Case: Upper case only.

3. Background Color: Clear.

4. Character Color: Contrasting color.

2.04 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA

A. Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as background color:

1. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding metal.

B. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

http://www.ada.gov/

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&item_s_key=00006864&item_key_date=901231&input_doc_number=ICC&input_doc_title=


SIGNAGE Page - 3

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.

C. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damaged items.

END OF SECTION


TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Page - 1

SECTION 10 28 00 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Commercial toilet accessories.

B. Commercial shower and bath accessories.

C. Accessories for toilet rooms and showers.

D. Grab bars.


A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed supports for accessories, including in wall framing and plates.


A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.

B. ASTM F2285 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing Tables for Commercial Use; 2004, with Editorial Revision (2016).

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide products listed on the drawings.

1. Design intent is to match the existing items.

2. Existing items shall be reused when possible unless items need to be purchased to match ADA requirements.

B. Provide products of each category type by single manufacturer.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.

1. Grind welded joints smooth.

2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

B. Keys: Provide 2 keys for each accessory to Owner; master key lockable accessories.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A666

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20F2285



C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.

D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; tamper-proof; security type.

E. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: Satin finish, unless otherwise noted.

B. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

2.04 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES

A. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, peened surface.

B. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/4 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall and inside of grab bar.

1. Length: 36 inches, 42 inches and 18 inches in configurations shown on drawings.

2. Product: B-6806 manufactured by Bobrick.

3. or equal.

2.05 COMMERCIAL SHOWER AND BATH ACCESSORIES

A. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 1 inch outside diameter, 0.04 inch wall thickness, satin-finished, with 3 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.04 inch thick satin-finished stainless steel flanges, for installation with exposed fasteners.


2. or equal.

B. Shower Curtain:

1. Existing shower curtain and hooks shall be reused in basement shower, or provided by the Owner.

C. Folding Bench Seat: Wall-mounted surface; welded tubular seat frame, structural support members, swing-down legs, hinges, and mechanical fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel, and seat.

1. Seat: Phenolic composite one-piece seat, of white color.

2. Size: ADA Standards compliant.

3. Products:

a. Seachrome Corporation; Accessibility Seats- Model SSB-220150 - 22"W x 15" D: www.seachrome.com/#sle.

b. or equal.

D. Robe Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel, double-prong, rectangular-shaped bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, satin finish.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.

B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.




3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on the drawings.

B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION


COUNTERTOPS Page - 1

SECTION 12 36 00 - COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Countertops for architectural cabinet work.

B. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops.


A. Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework.

B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.


A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.

B. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2009.

C. ANSI Z124.3 - American National Standard for Plastic Lavatories; 2005.

D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.

E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018b.

F. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2016).

G. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1; 2016, with Errata (2017).

H. ISFA 2-01 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; 2013.

I. ISFA 3-01 - Classification and Standards for Quartz Surfacing Material; 2013.

J. MIA (DSDM) - Dimensional Stone Design Manual, Version VIII; 2016.

K. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.

L. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Specimen warranty.

C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

E. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces.





http://www.awinet.org/

http://www.naaws-committee.com/

http://www.isfanow.org/Surfacing-Standards.aspx

http://www.isfanow.org/Surfacing-Standards.aspx

https://associationdatabase.com/aws/MIA/pt/sp/bookstore_home_page

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI/NEMA%20LD%203

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=APA%20PS1




A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 COUNTERTOPS

A. Design intent is to match the existing configuration appearance, finishes and colors, unless noted otherwise.

B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High-pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) sheet bonded to substrate.

1. Laminate Sheet, Unless otherwise indicated:: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness.

2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Postformed laminate; front edge substrate built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick with raised radiused edge, integral coved backsplash with radiused top edge.

3. Exposed Edge Treatment: Square, substrate built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick; covered with matching laminate.

4. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.

5. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 11 - Countertops, Custom Grade.

C. Stainless Steel Backsplash: ASTM A666, Type 304, stainless steel sheet; 16 gage, 0.0625 inch nominal sheet thickness.

1. Finish: 4B satin brushed finish.

D. Stainless Steel Countertops: ASTM A666, Type 304, stainless steel sheet; 16 gage, 0.0625 inch nominal sheet thickness.

1. Finish: 4B satin brushed finish.

2. Edge and Backsplash Sink Details: Match existing.

3. Exposed Edge Shape: Straight turndown with return; 1-1/2 inch high face, 1/2 inch return to face of case; reinforced with hardwood or steel.

4. Back and End Splashes: Same material; welded 1/4 inch radius coved joint to countertop; square top edge with 1 inch wide top surface and minimum 1/2 inch turndown.

5. Splash Dimensions: 4 inch high by 1 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply; minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines.

B. Particleboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.1 Grade 2-M-2, 45 pcf minimum density; minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines.

C. Medium Density Fiberboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.2.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI/NEMA%20LD%203


https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=APA%20PS1





D. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined.

E. Cove Molding for Top of Splashes: Rubber with semi-gloss finish and T-spline to fit between splash and wall; 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch.

F. Bracing and Brackets: Provide A & M Hardware bracket AMHLWS18X24Black.

G. Brackets for floating vanity counters: Provide Fedreal Brace Titus Hardware brackets.

1. Size: 10" x 18".

2. Finish: Galvanized.

3. Provide right and left hand brackets - anchor to stud per manufacturer recommendations.

H. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, white.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.

1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.

2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall.

3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.

B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated.

1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue.

2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops and wall panels up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

D. Stainless Steel: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece including nosings and back and end splashes; accurately fitted mechanical field joints in lengths over that dimension are permitted.

1. Weld joints; grind smooth and polish to match.

2. Provide stainless steel hat channel stiffeners, welded or soldered to underside, where indicated on drawings.

3. Provide wall clips for support of back/end splash turndowns.

4. Sound Deadening: Apply water resistant, fire resistant sound deadening mastic to entire bottom surface.

E. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide brackets and braces as indicated on drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.



3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required.

B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of 5/8 inch.

C. Attach stainless steel countertops using stainless steel fasteners and clips.

D. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum.

B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum.

C. Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS Page - 1

SECTION 220050 - BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 220000 “Plumbing General Requirements”.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 22 Sections.

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Concrete equipment base construction requirements. 3. Equipment nameplate data requirements. 4. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations. 5. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports. 6. Installation requirements common to equipment specification Sections. 7. Plumbing demolition. 8. Cutting and patching. 9. Touchup painting and finishing. 10. Firestopping

B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in piping system sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT CRITERIA

A. Material and equipment shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the product for at least 5 years.

B. Products shall be supported by a service organization which maintains an inventory of repair parts and is located within 100 miles of the jobsite.

C. All material, pipe joining material, and equipment used for conveyance of domestic water (potable water) shall meet the requirements set forth in the NSF International Standard/American National Standard NSF/ANSI 61 – Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects.

2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.



2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections in Division 22 for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3mm) maximum thickness,

except where thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250 cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. ASME B16.20 for grooved, ring-joint, steel flanges. 3. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, except where other thickness is

indicated; and full-face or ring type, except where type is indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, stainless steel, except where other materials are indicated.

D. Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, except where other type or materials are indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32.

1. Alloy Sn95: Lead Free 2. Alloy Sn50: Tin (50 percent) and lead (50 percent). 3. Alloy E: Tin (approximately 95 percent) and copper (approximately 5 percent). 4. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-zinc. 5. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-nickel.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

1. BCuP Series: Stay Silv 15 2. BAg1: Silver alloy.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvents complying with the following:

1. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS): ASTM D 2235. 2. Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC): ASTM F 493. 3. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC): ASTM D 2564. 4. PVC to ABS Transition: Made to requirements of ASTM D 3138, color other than orange.

I. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.

J. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon steel bolts and nuts.

K. Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of plain-end pressure pipes.

1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.



2. Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M), Grade 32510 or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3. Gaskets: Rubber. 4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111. 5. Finish: Enamel paint.

2.4 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.

1. Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation. 2. Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening. 3. Cast Brass: One-piece, with set-screw.

a. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and set-screw.

a. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.

1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials.

2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 3. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly for 250-psig (1725kPa) minimum

working pressure at a 180 deg F (82 deg C) temperature. 4. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly for 150- or 300-psig

(1035kPa or 2070kPa) minimum pressure to suit system pressures. 5. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-face

or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

a. Provide separate companion flanges and stainless steel bolts and nuts for 150- or

300-psig (1035kPa or 2070kPa) minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.

6. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling, having inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig (2070kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C) temperature.

7. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple, having inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300-psig (2070kPa) working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C) temperature.

2.6 SLEEVES

A. The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:

1. Steel Sheet-Metal: 24-gage (0.70mm) or heavier galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.



2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. 3. Cast-Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, having

plain ends and integral water stop, except where other features are specified. 4. Wall Penetration Systems: Wall sleeve assembly, consisting of housing, gaskets, and

pipe sleeve, with 1 mechanical-joint end conforming to AWWA C110 and 1 plain pipe-sleeve end.

a. Penetrating Pipe Deflection: 5 percent without leakage. b. Housing: Ductile-iron casting having waterstop and anchor ring, with ductile-iron

gland, steel studs and nuts, and rubber gasket conforming to AWWA C111, of housing and gasket size as required to fit penetrating pipe.

c. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile-iron pipe. d. Housing-to-Sleeve Gasket: Rubber or neoprene push-on type of manufacturer's

design.

5. Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: Commercially made sleeve having an integral clamping flange, with clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set-screws.

6. PVC Plastic: Manufactured, permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden

forms. 7. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. 8. PE Plastic: Manufactured, reusable, tapered, cup-shaped, smooth outer surface, with

nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

B. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular, watertight mechanical type. Components include interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Connecting bolts and pressure plates cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened.

2.7 LINTELS:

A. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, all lintels required for the support of building construction above pipes, boxes, panels, ducts, etc., shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor requiring the opening.

B. Lintels furnished shall be ASTM A 36 structural steel angles, channels, or tees of proper size and sections for the load being supported.

2.8 GROUT

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.50MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.

2.9 ACCESS PANELS

A. Access panels shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with factory applied prime coat of baked enamel.



B. Panel doors shall be attached to the frame with concealed hinges.

C. Cam locks shall be provided in not less than the following quantities:

Panel Height (Opposite side of hinges) 0 to 18" 1 cam lock 18-1/16" to 30" 2 cam locks 30-1/16" to 48" 3 cam locks 48-1/16" to 60" 4 cam locks

Panel Width 0 to 18" No cam locks on top or bottom 18-1/16" to 30" 1 cam lock top and bottom 30-1/16" to 48" 2 cam locks top and bottom

D. On the panel height, one of the cam locks described above shall be a key operated cylinder lock in lieu of the cam lock. One key shall operate all panels.

E. Cam locks shall have tamper-proof heads. Provide 5 tools to the owner.

F. For masonry, tile or wallboard surfaces, provide access panels with extruded aluminum frames, 3/4" border, aluminum piano hinges, screwdriver-operated cam lock, brushed satin aluminum finish. Final painting to match interior decor by others. Paintable finish to be provided when the adjacent construction is paintable.

G. Access panels will not be required in accessible type ceilings.

H. For plastered ceiling or wall, concealed flange, recessed door panel to receive plaster by others, continuous hinges, flush latch, white prime coat finish. Final painting to match interior decor by others.

I. For locations concealed from public, snap catch latches may be used.

J. Manufacturer - Panels shall be equal to Inryco/Milcor type K for plaster, type DW for drywall, type M for masonry.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Acceptable manufacturers: Gunnebo Fastening Corp., Hilti, Inc., ITW Ramset/Red Head., or Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.

B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

C. Drilled Inserts: Self-drilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: permitted in concrete not less than four inches thick. Applied load shall not exceed one-fourth the proof test load listed by the manufacturer. Phillips Red-head, wedge anchors or equal.

D. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.



E. Bolts and nuts, except as required for piping applications, shall be carbon steel in accordance with ASTM A 307 and shall be cadmium-plated, zinc-coated steel, or Type 304 stainless steel. Each bolt shall be provided with neoprene and cadmium-plated steel washers under the heads.

2.11 PREFABRICATED PIPE CURB ASSEMBLIES

A. Prefabricated pipe curb assemblies shall be heavy-gage, galvanized steel curb with mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch-thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; built-in cant and mounting flange for flat roof decks; and 2-inch wood nailer. Provide 14 inches high, where no other height is shown. Unit shall be furnished with an acrylic clad thermoplastic cover, fastening screws, and graduated step boots with stainless steel clamps. Units shall be Thycurb model TCC.

B. Equal products, complying with these specifications by the following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Pate 2. Roof Products & Systems 3. Thycurb 4. Approved Equal

2.12 PREFABRICATED PIPE SEALS

A. Seals for Roof Penetrations

1. Prefabricated pipe seals shall have a one piece spun aluminum base with a 5" high roof surface flange sloped for runoff. Unit shall have a PVC boot with graduated widths and adjustable stainless steel clamps. Unit shall withstand expansion, and vibration and shall fit pipe sizes from 1/2" through 10".be heavy-gage, galvanized steel curb with mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch-thick.

2. Equal products, complying with these specifications by the following manufacturers are acceptable:

a. Pate b. Roof Products & Systems c. Thycurb d. Approved Equal

B. Seals for Floor or Foundation Wall Penetrations

1. Mechanical Seal: Link-Seal or approved equal. A modular mechanical sealing assembly consisting of interlocking rubber links shaped to fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve; corrosion-protected carbon steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. After the assembly is positioned in the sleeve, tightening the bolts shall cause the rubber links to provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve. Seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide sleeves of proper diameters.



2.13 PREFABRICATED PIPE STANDS

A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

1. Manufacturers:

a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. b. MIRO Industries. c. Portable Pipe Hangers. d. Or Equal

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2.14 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS MARKERS

A. Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 22 Sections. Where more than one type is specified for listed application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.

B. Markers shall be by Allen Systems, Inc., W.H. Brady Co.- Signmark Div., Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. or equal.

C. Pipe banding shall consist of 1" wide single tape wrapped completely around the circumference of the pipe or insulation.

D. All color-coding shall comply with ANSI A13.1 1975.

E. Pipe markers shall be manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid plastic, snap-on type or vinyl, pressure-sensitive type with permanent adhesive.

F. Valve tags shall be brass, plastic laminate, or plastic valve tags that are 1½" diameter or square. Indicate piping system abbreviation in ¼" high letters and sequenced valve numbers with ½" high letters. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass or plated steel chain, or plated steel S-hooks of the sizes required for attachment of tags to valves.

G. Equipment markers shall be manufacturer's standard laminated plastic type. Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible: 1) Name, 2) tag number, and 3) Equipment service. Provide approximate 2½" x 4" markers for control devices, dampers, and valves; and 4½" x 6" for equipment.

H. Underground Piping Markers

1. Tape: Triple-laminate, consisting of aluminum foil, polyester film, and polyethylene, 6" wide.

2. Colored background, black lettering, two lines wide, and 2" tall letters. Provide different color tape for each piping service.

3. Acceptable Manufacturer, subject to compliance with requirements: Panduit Corporation.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.

C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.

D. Protect stored plastic pipes from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

E. Pipe and duct protection during construction: Protect pipe and duct interiors with plastic plugs or plastic sheeting during construction to protect from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS--COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise. Individual piping system specification Sections in Division 23 specify piping installation requirements unique to the piping system.

B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

C. Install piping at indicated slope.

D. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service areas.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, except where indicated.

H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch (25mm) clearance around insulation.

J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions.



M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:

1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast-brass, one-piece, with set-screw, and polished

chrome-plated finish. Use split-casting escutcheons, where required, for existing piping. 2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with set-screw. 3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates. 4. Insulated Piping: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and

chrome-plated finish. 5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with set-screw or spring clips.

N. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes.

O. Above Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch (25mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm). 2. Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger. 3. Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer's printed instructions.

P. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material.

Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in.

R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements.

S. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping system Sections. 1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly. 3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Soldering Manual," Chapter 22 "The

Soldering of Pipe and Tube." 4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Brazing Manual" in the "Pipe and

Tube" chapter. 5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

a. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal

seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads (except where

dry seal threading is specified). c. Align threads at point of assembly. d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being

threaded. e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads that are

corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12 "Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe" using qualified processes and welding operators according to the "Quality Assurance" Article.



7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.

8. Plastic Pipe and Fitting Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following standards:

a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe handling of solvent-cement and primers. b. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS): ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661. c. Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC): ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493. d. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure Application: ASTM D 2672. e. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Application: ASTM D 2855. f. PVC to ABS (Non-Pressure) Transition: Procedure and solvent cement described

in ASTM D 3138.

9. Plastic Pipe and Fitting Heat-Fusion Joints: Prepare pipe and fittings and join with heat-fusion equipment according to manufacturer's printed instructions.

a. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Butt joining. b. Plain-End Pipe and Socket-Type Fittings: Socket joining.

T. Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below.

1. Install unions in piping 2 inches (50 mm) and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final

connection to each piece of equipment having a 2-inch (50mm) or smaller threaded pipe connection.

2. Install flanges in piping 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and larger adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection.

3. Dry Piping Systems (Gas, Compressed Air, and Vacuum): Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems (Water): Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Piping Systems: Install pre-printed, color-coded, pipe markers on each system. Include lettering indicating service, and arrows showing normal direction of flow.

1. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping.

2. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot noninsulated pipes.

3. Locate pipe markers wherever piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums), and exposed exterior locations as follows:

a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark

each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious. c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter

inaccessible enclosures.



d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. f. Spaced at a maximum of 50-foot (15m) intervals along each run. Reduce intervals

to 25 feet (7.5 m) in congested areas of piping and equipment. g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced

markers.

4. Pipe markers shall identify piping systems terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary application length. Pipe marker materials shall be as follows: a. Preformed semi-rigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to

attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor barrier.

b. Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back. c. Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive,

permanent-type, self-adhesive back. 1) Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6

Inches: 3/4 inch minimum. 2) Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or

Larger: 1-1/2 inches minimum.

B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment.

1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch (6mm) -high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 2 feet (0.6 m), 1/2-inch (13mm) -high for distances up to 6 feet (1.8 m), and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering 2/3 to 3/4 of size of principal lettering.

2. Text of Signs: Provide text to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to name of identified unit.

C. VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

1. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

2. Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated with 0.032-inch thick 1-1/2” diameter brass valve tags with brass-breaded chain. Stamp or engrave with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Engineer. Letter color is to be black. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener.

D. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices which become visually blocked by work of this Division or other Divisions.

3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.



3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

3.6 DEMOLITION

A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove work specified under Division 22 and as indicated.

B. Where pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality.

C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe in its entirety.

D. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from the Project site.

E. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational equipment indicated for relocation.

3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. This Contractor shall sleeve all holes in the new construction for the installation of his work.

B. This Contractor shall cut all holes in floors, walls, ceiling, and roof necessary for the installation of the work in the existing building, except work shown on the Architectural Wrecking Drawings to be performed by the General Contractor.

C. The holes for piping shall be cut with a diamond edge core drill. Under no circumstances shall a pneumatic or electric hammer be used to cut holes in walls or floors with the exception of the floor on ground. Saw cutting of concrete slab on grade will not be required; however, the floors shall be scored with a sharp instrument to outline the trench before breaking floor to obtain a fairly straight line trench. Provide watertight receptacle, wedged to bottom of structure, where core drilling occurs; preventing water from staining finishes of floors below.

D. Before cutting holes in floors and ceilings; make careful field measurements at floor and ceiling to determine location of structural beams, and under no circumstances shall structural beams be cut or damaged during the cutting of these holes.

E. This Contractor shall coordinate the cutting of existing construction with the (Construction Manager, Owner, General Contractor) and shall obtain approval prior to commencing any demolition work.

F. The patching of all holes shall be by this Contractor. Where holes are left after removal of pipes or equipment, the openings shall be closed. All plaster ceiling, ceiling tile, floor tile, wall covering, etc. which must be removed in areas which will not receive new finishes under the General Contract Work must be replaced by this Contractor including all necessary painting to match existing colors. If the painted area does not blend into and match the adjacent area of a ceiling panel or wall panel, the entire ceiling or wall panel must be repainted. All such patching and painting shall restore areas to like conditions at time of starting work, subject to the direction and satisfaction of the Architect and Owner. This Contractor shall hire mechanics skilled in their trades to perform all patching work and painting where required. Refer to the



Architectural Plans and to the Room Finish Schedules to determine the scope of other Contractors work.

G. Where holes are left after removal of pipes or plumbing equipment or due to revisions, alteration, changes or errors, the openings shall be closed.

H. This Contractor shall hire mechanics skilled in their trades to perform all patching such as concrete work, plastering, painting, etc. Such patching shall restore areas to like conditions at time of starting work, and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.

3.8 CAULKING AND SEALANT

A. This Contractor shall furnish and install caulking and sealant for all piping passing through fire rated floor structural slab and partition walls. this shall apply to all piping whether concealed in chases, above dropped ceiling areas, or exposed.

B. A Fire-Stop System equivalent to 3M brand fire protection products as required for the specific application shall be used to seal penetrations of pipes and conduits through fire-rated walls and floors per NEC 300-21, NEC 800-3 (C), and ASTM E-814.

C. All piping shall be firmly secured prior to installation of putty or caulk. Inspect and clean opening of all loose foreign material prior to the installation of the putty or caulk.

D. Install caulk or putty as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.9 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT

A. All control devices, specialties, etc., shall be so located as to provide for easy access for operation, repair and maintenance; if concealed, access doors shall be provided by this Contractor.

B. The doors shall be Acudor Products Inc (www.acudor.com) of the following types: 1. Plaster ceilings-------------------------------------Type "PS5030" 2. Plaster walls-----------------------------------------Type "PS5030" 3. Masonry walls---------------------------------------Type "UF5000" 4. Gypsum drywall walls-----------------------------Type "DW5040" 5. Gypsum drywall ceilings--------------------------Type "DW5040" 6. Gypsum drywall above finished ceiling -------Type “UF5000”

C. No access doors shall be smaller than 18" x 18".

D. SPECIAL NOTE: Install "FW5050” “B" labeled access doors in all 1-hour and 2 -hour fire rated walls and ceilings.

E. Furnish all ceiling panels with a factory applied baked-on off-white enamel finish, and all wall panels with a factory applied prime coat, baked-on enamel finish.

F. Where valves, control devices, etc., are located above removable ceiling panels, this Contractor shall furnish and install color coded screws or tacks installed in the ceiling tile to identify the location.

G. All access panels will be installed by the contractor for the installation of the walls or the ceilings in locations designated by this Contractor.



H. Comparable access panels by Cesco or Milcor will be acceptable.

3.10 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

A. The contractor shall furnish and install seismic restraints as indicated in the “Anchorage and Sway Bracing for Mechanical System Components Schedule” on the Drawings and as specified in “Section 220549 Plumbing Systems, Supports, Bracing, and Seismic Requirements” or in Section “210549 Fire Protection Systems, Supports, Bracing, and Seismic Requirements”.

3.11 FLASHING:

A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for sound control where indicated on the drawings.

3.12 GROUTING

A. Install nonmetallic nonshrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms for placement of grout, as required.

D. Avoid air entrapment when placing grout.

E. Place grout to completely fill equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions.



PLUMBING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Page - 1

SECTION 220600 - PLUMBING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports to building structure.

2. Division 21 Sections on fire-suppression piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers. 3. Section 220548 "Mechanical Systems Vibration Control" for vibration isolation. 4. Section 220549 “Plumbing Systems; Supports, Bracing and Seismic Requirements”. 5. Section 220500 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

D. Design and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction for seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.



B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and characteristics of components and fabrication details.

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.


A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional engineer.

C. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Pipe Hangers: a. B-Line Systems, Inc. b. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. c. Grinnell Corp. d. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. e. National Pipe Hanger Corp.

2. Channel Support Systems:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc. b. Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit. c. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div. d. National Pipe Hanger Corp. e. Unistrut Corp.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: a. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. b. Pipe Shields, Inc.



2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types.

1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are

in direct contact with copper tubing.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield. 1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass with vapor barrier. 2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass. 3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe. 4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. 5. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below

ambient air temperature.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

C. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications.

2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Specification Sections.

C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:



1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 30. Provide Plastic coated hangers for hot piping.

2. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2. provide plastic coated hangers for hot piping.

3. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.

4. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

5. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

6. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

7. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 3. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.



11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.

12. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 13. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 14. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where head room is limited.

G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-density, 100-psi minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.

H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches . 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with

springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems.



1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

E. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.

J. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.



e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

3.4 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



PLUMBING PIPE INSULATION Page - 1

SECTION 220840 - PLUMBING PIPE INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and equipment insulation.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 220500 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hot Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures of 100 deg F or higher. B. Dual-Temperature Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures that vary from hot to cold. C. Cold Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures less than 75 deg F. D. Thermal Resistivity: "R-values" represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-value).

Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between two exposed faces required to cause one Btu to flow through one square foot of material, in one hour, at a given mean temperature.

E. Density: Expressed in lb/cu.ft.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for each type of mechanical insulation identifying k-value, thickness, and

accessories.


A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Conform to the following characteristics for insulation including facings, cements, and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or other testing or inspecting organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Label insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory.

1. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating

of 50 or less.



2. Exterior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed rating of 150 or less.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing of piping systems. B. Schedule insulation application after installation and testing of heat trace tape.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Glass Fiber:

a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Knauf Fiberglass GmbH. c. Johns Manville. d. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation.

2. Cellular Glass:

a. Owens Corning Corporation.

3. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular:

a. Armacell LLC. b. Aerocell. c. K-flex.

2.2 GLASS FIBER

A. Material: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin. B. Jacket: All-purpose, factory-applied, laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant

kraft paper and aluminum foil having self-sealing lap. C. Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, rigid pipe insulation, jacketed.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 average maximum at 75 deg F mean temperature. 2. Density: 10 average maximum.

D. Adhesive: Produced under the UL Classification and Follow-up service.

1. Type: Non-flammable, solvent-based. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.



E. Vapor Barrier Coating: Waterproof coating recommended by insulation manufacturer for

outside service. 2.3 CELLULAR GLASS

A. Material: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells, incombustible.

B. Facing: ASTM C 921, Type 1, factory-applied, laminated foil, flame-retardant, vinyl facing. C. Preformed Pipe: ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2 (jacketed). D. Thermal Conductivity: 0.38 average maximum at 75 deg F mean temperature. E. Minimum Density: 7 pcf. F. Maximum Density: 9.5 pcf.

2.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR

A. Material: Flexible expanded closed-cell structure with smooth skin on both sides.

1. Tubular Materials: ASTM C 534, Type I. 2. Sheet Materials: ASTM C 534, Type II.

B. Thermal Conductivity: 0.28 average maximum at 75 deg F. C. UV Coating: Water based latex enamel coating recommended by insulation

manufacturer. 2.5 ADHESIVES

A. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation Adhesive: Solvent-based, contact adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.

B. Lagging Adhesive: MIL-A-3316C, non-flammable adhesive in the following Classes and

Grades:

1. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass fiber insulation, sealing edges of glass fiber insulation, and bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass fiber insulation.

2. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass fiber insulation to metal surfaces. 2.6 JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, except as otherwise indicated. B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and

aluminum foil.

1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum, when tested according to



ASTM E 96. 2. Puncture Resistance: 50 beach units minimum, when tested according to

ASTM D 781.

C. PVC Jacketing: High-impact, ultra-violet-resistant PVC, 20-mils thick, roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

D. PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil-thick,

high-impact, ultra-violet-resistant PVC.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

E. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B 209, 3003 Alloy, H-14 temper, roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.

1. Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.010 inch thick. 2. Moisture Barrier: 3-mil Dupont Surlyn. 3. Elbows: Preformed 45-degree and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, same

material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

2.7 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Glass Tape: Woven glass fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 ounces per sq. yd.

1. Tape Width: 4 inches. 2. Tape Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type II.

B. Bands: 3/4-inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

1. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.

2.8 SEALING COMPOUNDS

A. Vapor Barrier Compound: Water-based, fire-resistive composition.

1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.08 perm maximum. 2. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.

B. Weatherproof Sealant: Flexible-elastomer-based, vapor-barrier sealant designed to seal

metal joints.

1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum. 2. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to 250 deg F. 3. Color: Aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION



A. Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and remove foreign materials such as rust, scale, oil, and dirt.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each plumbing system.

B. Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories

that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.

C. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes and equipment having surface operating

temperatures below 60 deg F. D. Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's

printed instructions. E. Install insulation with smooth, straight, and even surfaces. F. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier. G. Avoid penetrations in insulation for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in

insulation requiring a vapor barrier. H. Seal Ends: Except for flexible elastomeric insulation, taper ends at 45 degree angle and

seal with lagging adhesive. Cut ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with adhesive.

I. Apply adhesives and coatings at manufacturer's recommended coverage-per-gallon rate. J. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. K. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following

systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Flexible connectors for pipes. 2. Vibration control devices. 3. Testing laboratory labels and stamps. 4. Nameplates and data plates. 5. Access panels and doors in air distribution systems. 6. Fire protection piping systems. 7. Sanitary drainage and vent piping. 8. Below grade piping. 9. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, except for plumbing fixtures for the disabled. 10. Piping specialties including unions, strainers, check valves and flow regulators. 11. Radient floor manifolds.

3.3 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Tightly butt longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond with adhesive. B. Stagger joints on double layers of insulation.



C. Apply insulation continuously over fittings, valves, and specialties, except as otherwise indicated.

D. Apply insulation with a minimum number of joints. E. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with butt strips, at least 3-inches wide, and of same

material as insulation jacket. Secure with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of butt strip and space 4 inches on center.

3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches on center.

4. Vapor Barrier Coatings: Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply on seams and joints, over staples, and at ends butt to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.

5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with vapor barrier coating.

6. Repair damaged insulation jackets, except metal jackets, by applying jacket material around damaged jacket. Adhere, staple, and seal. Extend patch at least 2 inches in both directions beyond damaged insulation jacket and around the entire circumference of the pipe.

F. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the top of

the roof flashing. Seal with vapor barrier coating. Apply insulation for exterior applications butted tightly to interior insulation ends. Extend metal jacket for exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor barrier coating.

G. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below grade exterior walls, terminate

insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor barrier coating. H. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below grade exterior walls, extend metal

jacket for exterior insulation through penetration to a point 2 inches from interior surface of wall inside the building. Seal ends of metal jacket with vapor barrier coating. Secure metal jacket ends with metal band. At point where insulation metal jacket contacts mechanical sleeve seal, insert cellular glass preformed pipe insulation to allow sleeve seal tightening against metal jacket. Tighten and seal sleeve to jacket to form a watertight seal.

I. Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and

partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions. J. Fire-Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations

through fire-rated walls and partitions. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Seal around penetration with firestopping or fire-resistant joint sealer.

K. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floors. L. Flanges, Fittings, and Valves - Interior Exposed and Concealed: Coat pipe insulation

ends with vapor barrier coating. Apply premolded, precut, or field-fabricated segments of insulation around flanges, unions, valves, and fittings. Make joints tight. Bond with adhesive.

1. Use same material and thickness as adjacent pipe insulation. 2. Overlap nesting insulation by 2 inches or 1-pipe diameter, which ever is greater.



3. Apply materials with adhesive, fill voids with mineral fiber insulating cement. Secure with wire or tape.

4. Insulate elbows and tees smaller than 3-inches pipe size with premolded insulation. 5. Insulate elbows and tees 3 inches and larger with premolded insulation or insulation

material segments. Use at least 3 segments for each elbow. 6. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with PVC fitting covers and

seal circumferential joints with butt strips. 7. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with 2 layers of lagging

adhesive to a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. Install glass cloth between layers. Overlap adjacent insulation by 2 inches in both directions from joint with glass cloth and lagging adhesive.

M. Hangers and Anchors: Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor

attachments. Install saddles, shields, and inserts as specified in Division 15150. For cold surface piping, extend insulation on anchor legs a minimum of 12 inches and taper and seal insulation ends.

1. Inserts and Shields: Cover hanger inserts and shields with jacket material matching

adjacent pipe insulation. 3.4 BELOW GROUND PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. General: The following are additional requirements for insulation applied to piping installed below ground.

B. Coat bore surfaces of insulation materials with insulating cement of type recommended by

insulation manufacturer. Apply enough cement to fill surface cells. Do not use adhesives for this coating.

C. Secure insulation with a minimum of 2 stainless-steel bands for each section of insulation. D. Terminate insulation at anchor blocks. E. Apply insulation continuously through sleeves and manholes, except as specified above

for exterior wall penetrations. F. Finishing: Apply 3 coats of asphaltic mastic to a finish thickness of 3/16 inch over

insulation materials. Apply 10 x 10 mesh glass cloth between coats. Overlap edges of glass cloth by 2 inches.

3.5 GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Bond insulation to pipe with lagging adhesive. B. Seal exposed ends with lagging adhesive. C. Seal seams and joints with vapor barrier compound.

3.6 CELLULAR GLASS PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Cellular Glass Insulation: Join sections of cellular glass insulation with vapor barrier compound. Secure insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Seal joints with manufacturer's recommended joint sealer.



1. Multiple Layer Installations: Stagger joints of multilayer installations. Secure inner

layer with glass fiber reinforced tape. Secure outer layers with 2 metal bands for each insulation section.

2. Finishing: Apply manufacturer's recommended weather barrier mastic. 3. Finishing: Apply metal jacket over manufacturer's recommended vapor barrier

mastic. 3.7 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Slip insulation on the pipe before making connections wherever possible. Seal joints with adhesive. Where the slip-on technique is not possible, cut one side longitudinally and apply to the pipe. Use lap-seal product or seal seams and joints with adhesive.

B. Valves, Fittings, and Flanges: Cut insulation segments from pipe or sheet insulation.

Bond to valve, fitting, and flange and seal joints with adhesive.

1. Miter cut materials to cover soldered elbows and tees. 2. Fabricate sleeve fitting covers from flexible elastomeric cellular insulation for

screwed valves, fittings, and specialties. Miter cut materials. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation.

3.8 EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install board and block materials with a minimum dimension of 12 inches and a maximum dimension of 48 inches.

B. Groove and score insulation materials as required to fit as closely as possible to the

equipment and to fit contours of equipment. Stagger end joints. C. Insulation Thicknesses Greater than 2 Inches: Install insulation in multiple layers with

staggered joints. D. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joint. E. Secure sections of insulation in place with wire or bands spaced at 9-inch centers, except

for flexible elastomeric cellular insulation. F. Protect exposed corners with corner angles under wires and bands. G. Manholes, Handholes, and Information Plates: Bevel and seal insulation ends around

manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates. H. Removable Insulation: Install insulation on components that require periodic inspecting,

cleaning, and repairing for easy removal and replacement without damage to adjacent insulation.

I. Pumps: Where insulation is indicated, fabricate galvanized steel boxes lined with

elastomeric insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide joints in box with the splits in the pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges.

J. Finishing: Except for flexible elastomeric cellular insulation, apply 2 coats of vapor barrier

compound to a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. Install a layer of glass cloth embedded between layers.



3.9 GLASS FIBER EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Secure insulation with anchor pins and speed washers. B. Space anchors at maximum intervals of 18 inches in both directions and not more than 3

inches from edges and joints. C. Apply a smoothing coat of insulating and finishing cement to finished insulation.

3.10 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install sheets of the largest manageable size. B. Apply full coverage of adhesive to the surfaces of the equipment and to the insulation. C. Butt insulation joints firmly together and apply adhesive to insulation edges at joints.

3.11 JACKETS

A. Foil and Paper Jackets (FP): Install jackets drawn tight. Install lap or butt strips at joints with material same as jacket. Secure with adhesive. Install jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal joints and 3-inch-wide butt strips at end joints.

1. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor barrier jackets and exposed

insulation with vapor barrier compound.

B. Exterior Exposed Insulation: Install continuous aluminum jackets and seal all joints and seams with waterproof sealant.

C. Install metal jacket with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal and butt joints. Overlap longitudinal

joints to shed water. Seal butt joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel draw bands 12 inches on center and at butt joints.

3.12 FINISHES

A. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply 2 coats of protective coating to exposed insulation.

3.13 APPLICATIONS

A. General: Materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. B. Interior, Exposed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following

piping systems:

1. Domestic cold water. 2. Storm water. Insulate roof drain bodies, vertical and horizontal rainwater leaders of

storm water piping. 3. Domestic hot water.



4. Recirculated hot water. C. Interior, Concealed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following

piping systems:

1. Domestic cold water. 2. Storm water. Insulate roof drain bodies, vertical and horizontal rainwater leaders of

storm water piping. 3. Domestic hot water. 4. Recirculated hot water.

D. Exterior, Exposed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following

piping systems:

1. Domestic cold, hot and hot water recirculated water. 2. Storm water.

E. Exterior, Concealed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping systems:

1. Domestic cold, hot and hot water recirculated water. 2. Storm water.

F. Equipment: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following indoor equipment:

1. Domestic cold water equipment, tanks, and pumps. 2. Domestic hot water equipment, tanks, and water heaters. 3. Domestic water softeners and brine tanks 4. Refrigerated drinking water equipment, tanks, pumps, and heat exchangers.

3.14 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULES

A. General: Abbreviations used in the following schedules include: 1. Field-Applied Jackets: P - PVC, K - Foil and Paper, A - Aluminum, SS - Stainless Steel. 2. Pipe Sizes: NPS - Nominal Pipe Size.

3.15 PVC PIPE INSULATION IN PLENUM SPACES

A. Insulate all existing PVC pipe and fittings in the return air plenum spaces on the first and second floor areas with 1" thick, 3M Fire Barrier Plenum Wrap 5A pipe insulation. Install per manufactures instructions.

INTERIOR DOMESTIC HOT WATER AND RECIRCULATED HOT WATER PIPE THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD- SIZES IN BARRIER APPLIED (NPS) MATERIALS INCHES REQ'D JACKET 1/2 TO 2 GLASS FIBER 1/2 NO NONE FLEXIBLE 1/2 NO NONE ELASTOMERIC 2-1/2 TO 4 GLASS FIBER 1 NO NONE



CELLULAR GLASS 1 NO NONE FLEXIBLE 1 NO NONE ELASTOMERIC 5 TO 10 GLASS FIBER 1-1/2 NO NONE CELLULAR GLASS 1-1/2 NO NONE FLEXIBLE 1-1/2 NO NONE ELASTOMERIC

INTERIOR DOMESTIC COLD WATER AND STORM WATER PIPE THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD- SIZES IN BARRIER APPLIED (NPS) MATERIALS INCHES REQ'D JACKET 1/2 TO 2 GLASS FIBER 1/2 YES NONE CELLULAR GLASS 1 YES NONE FLEXIBLE 1/2 YES NONE ELASTOMERIC 2-1/2 TO 4 GLASS FIBER 1 NO NONE CELLULAR GLASS 1 NO NONE FLEXIBLE 1 NO NONE ELASTOMERIC 5 TO 10 GLASS FIBER 1-1/2 NO NONE CELLULAR GLASS 1-1/2 NO NONE FLEXIBLE 1-1/2 NO NONE ELASTOMERIC 3.15 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULES INTERIOR EXPOSED DOMESTIC COLD AND HOT WATER EQUIPMENT, TANKS, AND PUMPS THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD- IN BARRIER APPLIED MATERIAL FORM INCHES REQ'D JACKET GLASS FIBER BLOCK OR 1 YES NONE BOARD FLEXIBLE SHEET 3/4 YES NONE ELASTOMERIC END OF SECTION 220840


PLUMBING VALVES Page - 1

SECTION 221100 - PLUMBING VALVES PART 1) - GENERAL a) RELATED DOCUMENTS

i) Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

b) SUMMARY

i) This Section includes general duty valves common to plumbing piping systems. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this

Section:

(1) Special purpose valves specified in Division 22 piping system Sections. 2. Section 220500 “Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods”.

c) SUBMITTALS

i) General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Section 22 Specification Sections.

ii) Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and

temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.

iii) Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual

specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing.

d) QUALITY ASSURANCE

i) ASTM Compliance: Brass valves- ASTM B-61, ASTM B-62, and ASTM B-584. Silicon Brass- ASTM B-371 Alloy 694 or ASTM B-99 Alloy 651. Only valves containing 15% or less of zinc or valves meeting the ISO 6509 standard of heat-treated brass for Dezincification Resistance will be acceptable.

B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and

ASME B31.1 for power piping. C. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for

dimension and design criteria. D. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents

referenced. E. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable water.



e) DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

i) Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

(1) Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. (2) Protect threads, flange faces, and grooves. (3) Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. (4) Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. (5) Block check valves in either closed or open position.

ii) Use the following precautions during storage:

(1) Maintain valve end protection. (2) Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point

temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

iii) Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not

use handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2) - PRODUCTS a) MANUFACTURERS

i) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

(1) Ball Valves:

(a) Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Division. (b) Hammond Valve Corporation. c. Jomar Valve d. Milwaukee Valve. e. NIBCO Inc. f. Watts

(2) Calibrated Balancing Valves:

(a) Bell & Gossett (Xylem). b. Jomar Valve c. NIBCO Inc.

(3) Thermostatic Balancing Valves:

(a) Circuit Solver (ThermOmegaTech). b. Calleffi Thermosetter Thermal Balancing Valve

b) BASIC, COMMON FEATURES

i) Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of



Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures. ii) Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. iii) Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following

special operator features:

(1) Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn. (2) Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves 4 inches and smaller. (3) Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves 6 inches and larger.

iv) Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems

arranged to receive insulation. v) Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain

connections. vi) Threads: ASME B1.20.1. vii) Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.34 for

bronze and brass valves. c) BALL VALVES

i) Ball Valves, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze or heat treated CW511L brass body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball, full port for 1-inch valves and smaller and conventional or full port for 1-1/4-inch valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; teflon seats and seals; threaded or soldered end connections:

(1) Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle. (2) Operator: Lever operators with lock where called for on the drawings. (3) Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping. (4) Memory Stop: For operator handles.

d) BALANCING VALVES

i) Furnish and install in the hot water recirculating branches a balancing valve, circuit setter, or a thermostatic balance. If a circuit setter is used, then provide with provisions for connecting portable differential pressure meter. An integral pointer shall be installed to provide degree of valve opening. A calibrated chart shall accompany the circuit setter and may be used to determine flow rate. Each circuit setter shall be

constructed for 125 lbs. working pressure at 250°F, and supplied with a preformed polyurethane package that can be reused for insulation on the piping system. Before the job is turned over to the owner the Circuit Setters shall be adjusted to balance the circulation of hot water in all branches.

e) FLOW CONTROL VALVES

i) General: The Plumbing Contractor shall install automatic pressure compensating flow control valves where indicated on the drawings. Valves shall have the capacities and pressure differential characteristics as indicated in the schedule below.



ii) Valves shall be factory set and shall automatically lift the rate of flow to required engineered capacity with plus or minus 5% accuracy over an operating pressure differential of at least 14 times the minimum required for control.

iii) The control mechanism of the valve shall consist of a self-contained, open-chamber

cartridge assembly with unobstructed flow passages that eliminate accumulation of particles and debris. All internal working parts shall be passivated stainless steel.

iv) The cartridge assembly shall consist of a spring-loaded cup. The cup shall be guided

at two points and shall utilize the full available differential pressure across the valve to actuate the cup and thereby reduce friction, hysteresis and eliminate binding. It shall have a thin orifice plate for self-cleaning of the variable inlet ports over the full control range.

v) Valves shall be available in four pressure differential ranges, with the minimum range

requiring less than 2 psi to control flow. Gray cast iron or brass alloy valve bodies shall be provided with inlet and outlet tappings suitable for connection of the instruments for verification of flow rates. Valve bodies shall be rated for use of not less than 150% of system designed operating pressures.

vi) Certified performance data for the flow control valve, based on independent laboratory

tests, supervised and witnessed by a registered professional engineer, shall be available.

vii) All flow control valves shall be supplied by a single source responsibility. viii) Each automatic flow control valve shall be furnished with a valve kit consisting of 1/4

inch x 2 inch minimum nipples, quick-disconnect valves (to be located outside of insulation), and fittings suitable for use with the measuring instruments specified.

ix) Provide a metal identification tag, with chain, for each installed valve. The tag to be

metal stamped with zone identification, valve mode number, rated flow in GPM and differential pressure range.

x) Furnish and install ahead of each automatic flow control valve a bronze self cleaning

"Y" type strainer with blowoff and check valve. PART 3) - EXECUTION a) EXAMINATION

i) Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

ii) Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.

Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

iii) Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats

made accessible by such operation.



iv) Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. v) Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting

for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.

vi) Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

b) INSTALLATION

i) Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. ii) Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings

indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. iii) Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow

servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. iv) Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. v) Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe. vi) Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. vii) For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation. viii) Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

(1) Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level. (2) Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.

c) THREADED CONNECTIONS

i) Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

ii) Align threads at point of assembly. iii) Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where

dry seal threading is specified. iv) Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which

the pipe is being threaded.

d) FLANGED CONNECTIONS

i) Align flange surfaces parallel. ii) Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and

gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.



iii) For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream

for proper shutoff and retention. e) VALVE END SELECTION

i) Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

(1) Copper Tube Size, 2 Inches and Smaller: Threaded ends. (2) Copper Tube Size 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Flanged ends.

f) APPLICATION SCHEDULE

i) General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and butterfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications and arrangements.

ii) Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types:

(1) Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension. (2) Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron or elastomer-coated ductile iron disc;

EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. (3) Bronze or Brass Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat. (4) Check Valves: Class 125, swing or wafer type as indicated.

g) ADJUSTING

i) Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.



PIPING EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING Page - 1

SECTION 224100 - PIPING EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies pipe excavation and backfilling for buildings and structures. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section 220500 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”.

1.3 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall make all excavations required for constructing all sewers, water main, drains, and appurtenant structures as required by the Project Plans and Specifications. Except where otherwise required by the Project Plans and Specifications, or ordered by the Engineer, all excavations shall be in open cut to the specified widths and depths.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the conditions of all excavations made by him and

shall properly and adequately protect the excavation from caving or sliding. All slides and cave-ins shall be handled, removed, or corrected by the Contractor without extra compensation at whatever time and under whatever circumstances they may occur.

1.4 CLASSIFICATION

A. There shall be three classes of excavation:

1 Class A: Any material such as solid limestone or hard sandstone in original beds

or well-defined ledges; detached pieces of limestone or hard sandstone or mass concrete, any of which cannot be removed by heavy equipment without drilling and blasting or wedging.

2 Class B: Dense materials such as hard shales, soft sandstone, or broken rock or

concrete in detached pieces more than one cubic foot in volume, removable by heavy equipment without drilling and blasting or wedging. If the Contractor chooses and is permitted to use drilling, blasting, or wedging for removal of Class B material, such material will be measured or classified as Class B, and not as Class A.

3 Class C: All materials not included in Class A and Class B excavation.

PART 2 - EXCAVATION



2.1 GENERAL

A. The Plumbing Contractor shall make all excavations required for construction of all

underground sewers, water piping, drains, and all else required to make a complete and sanitary plumbing and storm drainage system.

B. This Contractor shall be responsible for the conditions of all excavations made by him and

shall properly and adequately protect the excavation from caving or sliding.

C. All excavation shall be made in open cut from the surface.

D. All surplus material which is not necessary for backfilling purposes shall be hauled from the site and disposed.

E. The bottom of the trench shall be over-excavated a minimum of 4 inches below the

bottom of the pipe and shall be shaped for the bell at each joint of pipe to ensure uniform bearing for the entire length of the pipe.

F. All excavation shall be dewatered before any construction is undertaken therein.

PART 1 - BACKFILL

1.1 GENERAL

A. The Plumbing Contractor shall backfill all trenches, restore all property damaged by this construction to as good condition as existed prior to excavation.

B. All backfill below slab on ground, pavement, walks, etc. shall be performed using 3/4 inch

minus crushed limestone and screenings. This material shall be placed in 9 inch layers and compacted with mechanical tampers to a minimum 95 percent maximum dry density when tested in accordance with ASTM D-698.

C. All piping shall be bedded in 3/4 inch minus crushed limestone and screenings. The

bedding shall not be less than 4 inches thick below the bottom of the pipe and shall extend to the springline of the pipe.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 METHODS OF PAYMENT FOR ADDITIONAL EXCAVATION

A. The volume of Class C excavation for which payment will be made will be determined for each size of pipe and for each class of excavation as computed from actual final measurements and from measurements made during construction. The total volume of excavation for each size of pipe sewer laid shall be computed as a square bottomed trench with vertical sides separated a distance equal to the trench width given in the table under excavation, a length equal to the actual horizontal distance between the payline limits for excavation of the connected structures; and a depth equal to the average vertical distance, measured at twenty-five foot intervals from a point directly below the pipe flow line, a distance equal to the pipe wall thickness plus four inches, to the bottom of concrete pavement base, the original surface of the ground, or the roadway surface. No additional measurement, computation, or payment will be made for excavation for pipe bells.



B. In case that either or both Class B or Class A excavation is encountered, the volume of

each class of excavation will be computed from its limits and location in the trench, similarly measures as described for Class C excavation.

2.2 ACCESS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY

A. All construction shall be confined to the public rights-of-way and to the areas designated

on the Owner's property. Should the Contractor damage any shrubbery or facilities besides those necessary in the immediate area of the new work, it shall be his re-sponsibility to settle the damages with the appropriate Owner. Every precaution possible shall be taken to protect shrubbery, trees, fences, walks, structures, lawns, etc. near the areas of construction.

2.3 PROTECTION

A. This Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable guard rails, barricades and warning

lights for the safety of the public as required by law or as ordered by the Construction Manager, and shall take all necessary precautions to prevent accidents. He shall make suitable and adequate provisions for the convenience and safety of the public and of the residents along the route of construction. He shall give adequate notice in writing to all Owners or occupants of property, buildings, structures, or utilities which may be affected by this work and which may required protection or adjustment. He shall not hinder their protective measures but shall exercise due care to protect all property. The Contractor shall not obstruct access to fire hydrants and service valves, nor to U.S. mail boxes. He shall restore, without delay to service, any utility service facilities damaged by his operations, and shall cooperate with utility companies in the restoration of their services.

2.1 DISPOSITION OF UTILITIES

A. Rules and regulations governing the respective utilities shall be observed in executing all

work under this section.

B. The drawings indicate the readily available record of locations of existing structures and facilities; both above and below the ground, but the Engineer assumes no responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of this information.

C. This Contractor shall proceed with caution in any excavation and shall use every means

to determine the exact location of underground structures, pipe lines, conduits, etc., prior to excavation in the immediate vicinity thereof. He shall be solely responsible for the costs of protection, or repair, or replacement of any structure, pipe lines, conduit, service connections, etc., above or below ground which may be broken or otherwise damaged by his operations. All water, sewer and gas pipes and other conduits adjacent to or crossing the trench must be properly supported or protected.

D. Underground Utilities - Wherever it becomes necessary to move or perform any work on

gas or water mains, or any other privately or publicly owned conduits encountered in or across the trenches, the Contractor shall make satisfactory arrangements for such work with the owners of such mains or conduits. All existing water mains, sewers, etc. must be protected from freezing by the Contractor.

E. All costs associated with the removal and replacement of existing utilities shall be

included in the price bid.



2.2 RESTORATION OF SITE

A. This Contractor shall protect and avoid damage to all public and private property along the line of work. Damage due to the carelessness of the Contractor shall be repaired or restored at his expense. Particular attention shall be paid to avoid damage to trees, shrubs, bushes, and private property located in and adjacent to easements on private property. No trees may be removed without the permission of the property owner.

B. All areas not scheduled to be replaced or restored by the General Work Contractor shall

be restored as nearly as practicable to their original condition by this Contractor. Damaged shrubbery or trees shall be replaced with new plants of equal type and quality. Finished lawn areas upon which earth has been deposited shall be cleared to the level of the existing sod, raked and watered. Areas where sod has been damaged, destroyed or ruts have been filled in, shall be resodded. Areas where sod is only slightly damaged may be lightly reseeded, if so permitted by the Engineer. After final restoration of the settled trench surfaces, trench areas shall be resodded, unless otherwise required in the Project Plans and Specifications.

C. Debris and unused materials shall be removed from the working areas without

unreasonable or unnecessary delay, and the working areas restored as nearly as practicable to their original conditions as soon as possible, in order to minimize damage, hazard, and inconvenience to the public and to the concerned property owners.



WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Page - 1

SECTION 224110 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water distribution piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment inside building.


1. Division 221400 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters, thermometers,

pressure gages, and fittings. 2. Division 224300 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping

specialties. 3. Section 220549 “Plumbing Systems; Supports, Bracing and Seismic Requirements”. 4. Section 220500 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”..

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Water Service Piping: Water piping outside building that conveys water to building. B. Service Entrance Piping: Water piping at entry into building between water service piping

and water distribution piping. C. Water Distribution Piping: Water piping inside building that conveys water to fixtures and

equipment throughout the building. D. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:

1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride. 2. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Combined Fire-Protection and Domestic, Service Entrance Piping: 200 psig. 2. Service Entrance Piping: 150 psig. 3. Water Distribution Piping: 150 psig.




A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified

standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and [ASTM B 88, Type M water tube, drawn temper.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1) MSS SP-123. 2) Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3) Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4) Solder-joint or threaded ends.

G. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings: 1) Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber,

O-ring seal in each end. 2) Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Cast-bronze or wrought-copper

fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end.

H. Copper Push-on-Joint Fittings:

1) Description:

a) Cast-copper fitting complying with ASME B16.18 or wrought-copper fitting complying with ASME B 16.22.

b) Stainless-steel teeth and EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end instead of solder-joint ends.

I. Appurtenances for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: 1) Bronze Fittings for Grooved-End, Copper Tubing: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M) copper

tube or ASTM B 584 bronze castings. 2) Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tubing:

a) Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. b) Ferrous housing sections. c) EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water. d) Bolts and nuts. e) Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).



2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe:

1) AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

2) Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:

1) AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron. 2) Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.

C. Compact-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:

1) AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron. 2) Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.

D. Plain-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.

E. Appurtenances for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: 1) Fittings for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron castings

or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions that match pipe. 2) Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Piping:

a) AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. b) Ferrous housing sections. c) EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water. d) Bolts and nuts. e) Minimum Pressure Rating:

a) NPS 14 to NPS 18 (DN 350 to DN 450): 250 psig (1725 kPa) b) NPS 20 to NPS 46 (DN 500 to DN 900): 150 psig (1035 kPa).

2.3 GALVANIZED-STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Galvanized-Steel Pipe:

1) ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Standard Weight. 2) Include ends matching joining method.

B. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Standard Weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

C. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions:

1) ASME B16.39, Class 150. 2) Hexagonal-stock body. 3) Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface.



4) Threaded ends.

E. Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125, cast iron.

F. Appurtenances for Grooved-End, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: 1) Fittings for Grooved-End, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Galvanized, ASTM A 47/A 47M,

malleable-iron casting; ASTM A 106/A 106M, steel pipe; or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.

2) Fittings for Grooved-End, Galvanized-Steel Pipe:

a) AWWA C606 for steel-pipe dimensions. b) Ferrous housing sections. c) EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water. d) Bolts and nuts. e) Minimum Pressure Rating:

a) NPS 8 (DN 200) and Smaller: 600 psig (4137 kPa) b) NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 to DN 300): 400 psig (2758 kPa). c) NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600): 250 psig (1725 kPa).

2.4 CPVC PIPING

A. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F 441/F 441M, Schedule 80.

1) CPVC Socket Fittings: ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80. 2) CPVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM F 437, Schedule 80.

B. CPVC Piping System: ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, SDR 11, pipe and socket fittings.

C. CPVC Tubing System: ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, SDR 11, tube and socket fittings.

2.5 PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS (Non Barrier, Flexible)

A. PEX Distribution System: ASTM F 877, SDR 9 tubing.

B. Fittings for PEX Tube: ASTM F 1807, metal-insert type with copper or stainless-steel crimp rings and matching PEX tube dimensions. Use of serrated only fittings is not acceptable.

C. Manifold: Multiple-outlet, plastic or corrosion-resistant-metal assembly complying with ASTM F 877; with plastic or corrosion-resistant-metal valve for each outlet.

D. PEX tube and fittings must meet ASTM E-84 for Plenum use or insulated per manufactures instructions to meet plenum fire and smoke ratings.

2.6 PEX-AL-PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS (Non Barrier, Flexible, Holds Shape)

A. PEX-AL-PEX Distribution System: ASTM F 1281 tubing.

B. Fittings for PEX-AL-PEX Tube: ASTM F 1281, metal-insert type with copper or stainless-steel crimp rings and matching PEX-AL-PEX tube dimensions. Use of serrated only fittings is not acceptable.



C. PEX tube and fittings must meet ASTM E-84 for Plenum use or insulated per manufactures instructions to meet plenum fire and smoke ratings.

2.7 JOINING MATERIALS

A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3

"Piping Applications" Article. B. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95; lead free.

C. Ductile-Iron, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include

ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and bolts and nuts. D. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure

rating at least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined. 2.8 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT

A. Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105 polyethylene film, 0.008-inch minimum thickness, tube or sheet.

2.9 VALVES

A. Refer to Division 22110 Section "Plumbing Valves" for general-duty valves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aboveground, Water Distribution Piping: Use the following:

1. 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper, solder-joint fittings;

and soldered joints. 2. 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type M; copper, solder-joint fittings;

and soldered joints. 3. 3 to 4-Inch NPS : Hard copper tube, Type L; copper, solder-joint fittings; and

soldered joints. 4. 6-Inch and Larger NPS: Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper,

grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings. Couplings must be Victaulic. 5. 3-inch NPS and Smaller: PEX or PEX-AL Tubing and fittings

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, or butterfly valves.



B. Grooved-end butterfly valves may be used with grooved-end piping.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.

3.4 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install piping with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain. 3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to

coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. C. Solvent-Cemented, Thermoplastic Pipe and Fitting Joints: Handle cleaners, primers, and

solvent cements according to ASTM F 402. 3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, and where indicated. Use ball valves for piping 2-inch NPS and smaller. Use butterfly valves for piping 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger.

B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment, on each supply to

plumbing fixtures without supply stops, and where indicated. Use ball valves for piping 2-inch NPS and smaller. Use butterfly valves for piping 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger.

C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points

in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.

1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.

D. Balancing Valves: Install in each hot-water circulation return branch, discharge side of each pump and circulator, and where indicated.. Refer to Division 22110 Section "Plumbing Valves" for balancing valves.

3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 220600 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

1) Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2) Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a) 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b) Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c) Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.



3) Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4) Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm).

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1) NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2) NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-

mm) rod. 3) NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-

mm) rod. 4) NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5) NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 6) NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 7) NPS 8 (DN 200): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

F. Install hangers for PEX or PEX-AL piping every 48-inches.

G. Install hangers for galvanized steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1) NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.

H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

I. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

B. Connect water distribution piping to service entrance piping at shutoff valve, and extend to

and connect to the following:

1. Booster Systems: Connect cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Connect cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes

indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but

not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."

4. Equipment: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger.



3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect water distribution piping as follows: B. Inspect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved

by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

A. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. B. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or

inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction. 3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed, procedure described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below:

A. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not

appear at outlets. B. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.

C. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine is no longer in water

coming from system after the standing time. D. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

Repeat procedure if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.11 COMMISSIONING

A. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that



piping is full of water. B. Perform the following steps before putting into operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Set ballancing valves to proper setting. 4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of

piping during installation. 5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.

C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate water heaters before filling with water.

D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

1. Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 80 psig maximum, unless

otherwise indicated.

E. Energize pumps and verify proper operation. END OF SECTION 224110


DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING Page - 1

SECTION 224200 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sanitary drainage and vent piping, and storm drainage piping inside building and to locations indicated.


1. Division 224300 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drainage and vent piping system

specialties. 2. Section 220549 “Plumbing Systems; Supports, Bracing and Seismic Requirements”. 3. Section 220500 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Sewerage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys sanitary sewage from building.

B. Drainage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys storm drainage from

building. C. Service Entrance Piping: Drainage piping at entry into building between outside building

sewer piping and inside drainage piping. D. Drainage and Vent Piping: Piping inside building that conveys waste water and vapors

from fixtures and equipment throughout the building. E. Force-Main Piping: Drainage piping, under pressure. F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and other piping materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene. 2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene polymer, rubber. 3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:



1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 10-foot head of water. 2. Storm Drainage Systems: 10-foot head of water. 3. Sewage, Force-Main Piping Systems: 100 psig.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Test Results and Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.

B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and

installation. C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic

piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES AND TUBES

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74, Service classes. C. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. D. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. E. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1784, Schedule 40 Solid Wall PVC. F. FOAM CORE pipe and fittings will not be an acceptable substitution for PVC pipe and

fittings. 2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron, Soil-Pipe Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service classes, hub and

spigot.



C. Hubless, Cast-Iron, Soil-Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301. D. Copper, Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23 cast copper or ASME B16.29

wrought copper. E. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311 drain, waste, and vent pipe

patterns. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly

used joining materials. C. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95, Sn94, or E; lead free. D. Hubless, Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing,

corrosion-resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve or gasket with integral, center pipe stop. Include the following:

1. Heavy-Duty, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel

housing or shield; and stainless-steel clamps. Include gasket. Couplings Shall be Made By Anaheim Foundry “Husky” Series 4000 Coupling.

E. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure

rating at least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined. F. Flexible, Transition Couplings for Underground, Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with

elastomeric sleeve. Include ends same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

1. Sleeve Type for Plain-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and stainless-steel

band assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of piping to be joined. Include the following:

a. Sleeves for Cast-Iron Soil Piping: ASTM C 564 rubber. b. Sleeves for Plastic Piping: ASTM F 477 elastomeric seal. c. Sleeves for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined. d. Bands: Stainless steel, one at each pipe insert.

2. Gasket Type for Dissimilar-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric compression gasket,

made to match inside diameter of pipe or hub, and outside diameter of adjoining pipe. Include the following:

a. Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil Piping: ASTM C 564 rubber. b. Gaskets for Plastic Piping: ASTM F 477 elastomeric seal. c. Gaskets for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 224100 Section "Excavation and Backfilling" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated. C. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following:

1. 1-1/4- and 1-1/2-Inch NPS: Hard copper drainage tube; copper, solder-joint drainage fittings; and soldered joints.

2. 1-1/4- and 1-1/2-Inch NPS: PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-

cemented joints. 3. 2- to 4-Inch NPS: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service class; hub-and-spigot,

cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; rubber compression joints. 4. 2- to 4-Inch NPS: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings;

cast-iron, heavy duty soil-piping couplings: 5. 5- Inch and Larger NPS: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service class; hub-and-

spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; rubber compression joints.

6. 5- Inch and Larger NPS : Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings; heavy duty soil-piping couplings:

7. 2-Inch to 4-Inch NPS: PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented

joints. 8. 5-Inch and Larger NPS: PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-

cemented joints.

D. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following:

1. 2-Inch and Larger NPS: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; and rubber compression joints.

2. 2-Inch and Larger NPS : PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-

cemented joints. 3. Piping Located Below Mechanical Rooms: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe,

Service class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; and rubber compression joints.

E. Aboveground, Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following:



1. 3- Inch and Larger NPS : Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; rubber compression joints.

2. 3-Inch and Larger NPS : Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe

fittings; hubless, cast-iron, heavy duty soil-piping couplings: 3. 3- to 10-Inch NPS : PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented

joints.

F. Underground, Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following:

1. 3-Inch and Larger NPS : Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; and rubber compression joints.

2. 3-Inch and Larger NPS: PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-

cemented joints. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Refer to Division 220500 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.

3.4 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in sizes and locations indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connections of building sanitary drains with building sanitary sewers.

B. Extend building storm drain piping and connect to storm sewer piping in sizes and

locations indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connections of building storm drains and building storm sewers.

C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service

entrance pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Refer to Division 22 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

D. Install wall penetration system at each service entrance pipe penetration through

foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 22 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for wall penetration systems.

3.5 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

B. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches,

bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not make change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees. Use proper size



of standard increasers and reducers if different sizes of piping are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

C. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to

grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

D. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise

indicated:

1. Sanitary Building Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping 3-inch NPS and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping 4-inch NPS and larger.

2. Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Storm Building Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow. 4. Horizontal, Storm Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow. 5. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

E. Install force mains at elevations indicated. F. Install engineered, sanitary drainage and vent systems in locations indicated and as

follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slab on grade if

slab is without membrane waterproofing. H. Install PVC plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665. I. Install underground, PVC plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 220500 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Compression Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. 2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.

C. PVC Piping Joints: Join drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665. D. Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in

ASTM F 402 for safe handling during joining of plastic pipe and fittings.

3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION



A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."

B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install the following:

1) Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2) Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:

a) 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b) Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c) Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3) Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4) Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports."

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1) NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

2) NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3) NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-

mm) rod. 4) NPS 6 (DN 150): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 5) NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm)

rod.

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1) NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2) NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3) NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4) NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5) NPS 3 (DN 80): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 6) NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 7) NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 8) NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.

I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).



J. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1) NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2) NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-

mm) rod.

K. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

L. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1) NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

2) NPS 3 (DN 80): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3) NPS 4 and 5 (DN 100 and 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 4) NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 5) NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm)

rod.

M. Install supports for vertical [ABS] [and] [PVC] piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).

N. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior sewerage and drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

B. Connect drainage piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the

following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."

2. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties."

3. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger.

C. Connect force-main piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the

following:

1. Sump Pumps: Connect force-main piping to sump-pump discharge. 2. Sewage Pumps: Connect force-main piping to sewage-pump discharge.


A. Inspect drainage and vent piping as follows:



1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing

or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having

jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or

inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedure, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.

3. Roughing-In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet of head. Water level must not drop from 15 minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

C. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedure, as follows:

1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main

piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.

2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

3. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.



4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and

debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats of water-

based latex paint. END OF SECTION 224200


PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Page - 1

SECTION 224300 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing specialties for the following: 1. Water distribution systems. 2. Soil, waste, and vent systems. 3. Storm drainage systems.


1. Division 220500 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" 2. Section 220549 “Plumbing Systems; Supports, Bracing and Seismic Requirements”. 3. Division 221100 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and

globe valves. 4. Division 221400 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages,

fittings, and water meters. 5. Division 224110 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for water-supply piping and

connections. 6. Division 224200 Section "Drainage and Vent Piping" for drainage and vent piping

and connections. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Water Distribution Piping: 150 psig. 2. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. 3. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water. 4. Force-Main Piping: 100 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each plumbing specialty indicated. Include rated capacities of selected equipment and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following plumbing specialty products: 1. Water filters. 2. Strainers. 3. Water hammer arresters. 4. Drain valves. 5. Cleanouts. 6. Floor drains, open receptors, and trench drains.



7. Air-admittance valves. .

B. Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. C. Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in the maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1. Include the following:

1. Backflow preventers. 2. Water regulators. 3. Water filters. 4. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves. 5. Wall hydrants and hose bibbs. 6. Backwater valves. 7. Gas / Oil interceptors, and solids interceptors.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of plumbing specialties and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."

B. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties made to

specified standards. C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated plumbing specialties specified in this

Section that are listed and labeled.

1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.

D. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.

E. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical components. F. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic

potable-water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water piping and "NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. Water Filter Cartridges: Furnish quantity not less than 100 percent of amount of

each type and size installed. 2. Operating Key Handles: Furnish one extra key for each key-operated hose bibb and

hydrant installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings:

a. Brass Craft. b. Moen, Inc.; Dearborn Brass Co. Div. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.

2. Water Filters:

a. Filterrite Manufacturing Co. b. Filtrine Manufacturing Co. c. Osmonics, Inc.; Hytrex Div. d. Service Filtration Corp.; Filterspun Div.

3. Water Hammer Arresters:

a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. d. Wilkins Industries.

4. Air-Admittance Valves:

a. Oatey Co. b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.

10. Trap Primers:

c. PPP Industries. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e. Sioux Chief

2.2 TRAP PRIMERS

A. Install trap seal primers on all floor drains. Trap seal primers shall be equal to PPP model

PR-500 or equal.

2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Vacuum breakers where required or indicated on the drawings, shall be equal to Watts Anti-Siphon vacuum Breaker No. 288A in sizes 1/4" to 3". Where exposed vacuum breaker shall have a polished

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nonremovable and

manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet. Units attached to rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.

2.4 DISHWASHER AIR-GAP FITTINGS

A. Description: ASSE 1021, fitting suitable for use with domestic dishwashers and for deck mounting; with plastic body, chrome-plated brass cover; and capacity of at least 5 gpm; and inlet pressure of at least 5 psig at temperature of at least 140 deg F. Include 5/8-inch-



ID inlet and 7/8-inch- ID outlet hose connections. 2.5 WATER REGULATORS

A. Automatic Control Valves 2" and Larger

1. Furnish and install Watts, or approved equal, 115 SS all bronze body, pilot operated water pressure reducing valves with stainless steel trim where indicated on the drawings.

2. Each valve shall be furnished with flanged ends on valves 2-1/2" and larger and

threaded ends on 2" valves. Furnish a stainless steel pilot with stainless steel flex tubing and brass fittings and a fig. 50 position indicator with air bleed valve.

3. All water pressure reducing valves must have a strainer installed ahead of each

valve. A bronze self-cleaning "Y" type strainer with blow-off shall be installed. 4. A shut-off valve shall be installed in the line ahead and after each strainer and

reducing valve, and in the bypass line around the reducing valves. A pressure gauge shall be installed in the common line on the upstream and downstream side of the pressure reducing station.

B. Automatic Control Valves 2" and Smaller

1. Furnish and install Watts, or approved equal, LF25AUB-Z3 Lead Free, stainless

steel pressure regulator valve where indicated on the drawings. 2. Each valve shall be furnished with threaded ends. 3. All water pressure reducing valves must have a strainer installed ahead of each

valve. A bronze self-cleaning "Y" type strainer with blow-off shall be installed. 2.6 PIPE STRAINERS

A. Furnish and install a strainer ahead of all pressure regulating valves, etc. as indicated in this specification and on the contract drawings.

B. Strainers shall be equal to Mueller Steam Specialty #351 or #352 bronze body, self

cleaning "Y" type strainer with 20 mesh stainless steel screen (1/32" openings) in all sizes through 2", and 1/16" diameter perforations for 2-1/2" size through 4". Install a blow-off valve with hose thread outlet for cleaning purposes. Strainers to have F.I.P. threaded connections and be rated for a minimum of 250 psi W.W.P.

C. Similar strainers as manufactured by Watts Regulator Company Model No. 777S or 77S

will be acceptable in 2-1/2" size and smaller. 2.7 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanout Plugs: Cast bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1; countersunk type.

B. Floor Cleanouts: Cast iron body and frame; cleanout plug; adjustable nickel-bronze top,

flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish similar to J. R. Smith 4108C. C. Wall Cleanouts: Cast iron body adaptable to pipe with cast bronze or brass cleanout plug;



stainless steel cover including screw similar to J. R. Smith 4532S. D. Cleanouts that terminate at grade, in driveways, parking areas, etc. shall be J. R. Smith

4248C-G-CSS all galvanized cast iron cleanout with adjustable housing, cut-off ferrule, internal threaded brass plug, and round cast iron loose scoriated tractor type screwed down cover. Center cleanouts at grade within a 18" x 18" x 6" thick concrete pad. Set top of pad flush with finished grade.

E. Sanitary soil and waste system: Install cleanouts to floor in all underground piping where

shown on the drawings and in the vertical riser at the base of the stack a minimum of three (3) feet above the floor.

F. Storm drainage system: Install cleanouts to floor in all underground piping where shown

on the drawings and in the vertical riser at the base of the riser a minimum of three (3) feet above the floor.

G. Cleanouts shall be of the same nominal size as the pipes up to 6 inches and not less than

6 inches for larger piping. H. Cleanouts on concealed piping shall be extended through and terminate flush with the

finished wall or floor. 2.8 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Install trap seal primers on all floor drains. Trap seal primers shall be equal to PPP model PR-500.

2.9 SHOCK ABSORBERS

A. Furnish and install where indicated on the drawings, Sioux Chief or equivalent Series 650 Dual ‘O’ Ring Piston, Copper Chamber, Shock Absorbers according to the following schedule.

Shock Absorber Designation Sioux Chief No.

“A” 652-AS

"B" 653-BS "C" 654-CS "D" 655-DS "E" 656-ES "F" 657-FS

B. Install the shock absorbers in the piping between the manual shut-off valve and the connection to the equipment noted on the drawings.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for final sizing of shock absorbers if field installation differs

from documents. D. Shock Absorbers must meet PDI-WH-201 standards. E. Only Dual ‘O’ Ring Piston, Copper Chamber style shock absorbers will be accepted.

2.10 WATER FILTERS

A. General: Cartridge-type assemblies suitable for potable water of size and at flow rate and



pressure loss indicated. Include housing, fittings, filter cartridges, and cartridge end caps. B. Wall-Mounting Type: Housing head section with threaded inlet and outlet, mounting

bracket, and removable lower section for 10-inch- long filter cartridge.

1. Housing Material: Stainless steel, 150-psig minimum operating pressure. 2. Cartridge: Wound- or molded-fiber filter media, 10 inches, 10-micron-particulate

removable rating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLUMBING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install plumbing specialty components, connections, and devices according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid

valve, and where indicated. C. Install trap seal primer valves with valve outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a

minimum of one percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

D. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors as indicated. E. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where

not indicated, according to the following:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to 64-inch NPS . Use 6-inch NPS for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping 4-inch NPS and smaller and 100

feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil, storm water and waste stack.

F. Install cleanout deck plates, of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor, for floor

cleanouts for piping below floors. G. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with

finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping. H. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through

floors with waterproof membrane. I. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set

with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

1. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depression.

J. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless

otherwise indicated. K. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and



adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. L. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. M. Install interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to

authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.

1. Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension if required, with cover flush with finished floor.

3. Recessed Floor Installation: Set unit in receiver housing having bottom or cradle supports, with receiver housing cover flush with finished floor.

4. Pit Installation: Set unit in pit as indicated. 5. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral

cleanout on outlet. 6. Coordinate oil-interceptor storage tank and gravity drain with

Division 2 Section "Oil Distribution Systems."

N. Fasten recessed, wall-mounting plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls. O. Secure supplies to supports or substrate. P. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or

globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Q. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations. R. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap

is indicated. S. Locate drainage piping as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures and

drains. T. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations

and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

U. Include wood-blocking reinforcement for recessed and wall-mounting plumbing

specialties. 3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install piping connections between plumbing specialties and piping specified in other

Division 22 Sections. 2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in

other Sections; connect directly to plumbing piping systems. 3. Install piping connections indicated as indirect wastes from appliances and

equipment specified in other Sections, to spill over receptors connected to plumbing piping systems.



B. Install hoses between plumbing specialties and appliances as required for connections. C. Arrange for electric-power connections to plumbing specialties and devices that require

power. Electric power is specified in Division 16 Sections. D. Supply Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install hot- and cold-water-supply piping of sizes

indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Drainage Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install drainage and vent piping, with

approved trap, of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Ground electric-powered plumbing specialties.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

G. Arrange for electric-power connections to plumbing specialties and devices that require

power. Electric power, wiring, and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of grease recovery units, including piping and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.

1. Test and adjust plumbing specialty controls and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and components. 3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. Before startup, perform the following checks: 1. System tests are complete. 2. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired. 3. Clear space is provided for servicing specialties.

B. Before operating systems, perform the following steps:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open general-duty valves to fully open position. 3. Remove and clean strainers. 4. Verify that drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until

clear.

C. Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If no procedures are prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows:

1. Energize circuits for electrically operated units. Start and run units through complete

sequence of operations.

D. Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning.



3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup services and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to

startup of and servicing interceptors. 2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to

startup of and servicing grease recovery units. 3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract

Closeout." 4. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation

and Maintenance Data." 5. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



PLUMBING FIXTURES Page - 1

SECTION 224400 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, faucets, other fittings, and related components.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters.

2. Division 22 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves used as supply stops. 3. Section 220549 “Plumbing Systems; Supports, Bracing and Seismic Requirements”. 4. Section 220500 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: Plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be approached, entered, and used by physically handicapped, disabled, and elderly people.

B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified

in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, traps and waste pipes. Pipe fittings, tube fittings, and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data for each plumbing fixture category and type specified. Include selected

fixture, trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

C. Maintenance data for plumbing fixtures and components to include in the operation and

maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category from one source and by a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: Where fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a

single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for this category.


PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 2

B. Energy Policy Act Requirements: Comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486,

"Energy Policy Act," regarding water flow rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures.

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures and components specified in

this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

D. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are

compatible.

E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of plumbing fixtures and are based on specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' fixtures with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."

F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

plumbing fixtures:

1. Plastic Mop-Service Basins: ANSI Z124.6.

2. Plastic Shower Enclosures: ANSI Z124.2.

3. Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462.

4. Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other Than Service Sinks: ASME A112.19.3M.

5. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.

6. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.

7. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.

2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M.

3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.

4. Faucet Hose: ASTM D 3901.

5. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M.

6. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.

7. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.

8. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

9. NSF Materials: NSF 61.

10. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

11. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.

12. Supply and Drain Fittings: ASME A112.18.1M.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for shower faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M.

2. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASSE 1016.

3. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M.

4. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.



5. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F 445.


7. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.


9. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.

10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.

11. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings:

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1M.

3. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.

4. Plastic Tubular Fittings and Piping: ASTM F 409.

5. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.

6. Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME A112.18.1M.

J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.

2. Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M.

3. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.


5. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.


7. Plastic Shower Receptors: ANSI Z124.2.

8. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.

9. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering.

B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in dry location. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations and verify that plumbing fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of each type and size installed.

2. Supply, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of each type and size installed.



3. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. For fixture descriptions in other Part 2 articles where the subparagraph titles "Product" and "Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers and their products or manufacturers only, the following requirements apply for product selection:

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM

A. Sink Faucet: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

1. Manufacturers:

a. American Standard

b. Bradley Corporation

c. Chicago Faucet

2. Performance: See schedule on drawings.

B. Toilet Seat: Solid plastic.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Olsonite Corporation

b. American Standard

c. Cjircj Seat Co.

d. Bemis Manufacturing Co.

C. Protective Shielding Guard: Manufactured, plastic covering for hot and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping and complying with ADA requirements.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Trubro, Inc.

b. Plumberex Specialty Products

c. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.

2. Accessible Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.

D. Water Closets: Wall-mounting, wall-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation.

1. Products:

a. American Standard, Inc.

b. Kohler Co.



c. TOTO, Inc.

E. Kitchen Sinks: Residential, counter-mounting, stainless-steel fixture.

1. Products:

a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.

b. Just Manufacturing Co.

2.3 FITTINGS

A. Fittings for Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this Section for materials for supplies, supply stops, supply risers, traps, and other fittings.

B. Fittings for Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Fittings include the following:

1. Supply Inlets: Brass pipe or copper tube, size required for final connection.

2. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, angle or straight; compression, loose-key type; same size as supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser.

3. Supply Risers: 3/8-inch NPS flexible copper tube with knob end. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications.

4. Traps: Cast brass with slip-joint inlet, cleanout pipe nipple to wall, wall flange, escutcheons, and size to match equipment. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for potable, hot- and cold-water supply piping systems; soil, waste, and vent piping systems; and supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and locations and types of supports match those indicated, before installing and connecting fixtures. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data when roughing-in data are not indicated.

B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Include supports for plumbing fixtures according to the following:

1. Carriers: For wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall construction. Carriers shall be equal to J. R. Smith 0115, 0175, 0209, 0210, 0230 & 0240 with suffix M51 foot support.

2. Chair Carriers: For wall-hanging urinals, lavatories, sinks, drinking fountains, and electric water coolers. Carriers shall be equal to J. R. Smith 0635, 0700, 0830 & 0913 Pro-Set carriers.



B. Include fitting insulation kits for accessible fixtures according to the following:

1. Lavatories: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste to wall.

2. Sinks: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste to wall.

3. Fixtures with Offset Drain: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, offset drain, trap, and waste to wall.

4. Other Fixtures: Cover exposed fittings below fixture. 3.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, faucets, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions, roughing-in

drawings, and referenced standards.

C. Install wall-hanging, back-outlet water closets with support manufacturer's tiling frame or setting gage.

D. Install toilet seats on water closets.

E. Install wall-hanging, back-outlet urinals with gasket seals.

F. Install Flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on

wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for handicapped people to reach.

G. Fasten recessed, wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.

H. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.

I. Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework.

J. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture.

K. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to fixture.

1. Exception: Omit stop valves on supplies to emergency equipment, except when

permitted by authorities having jurisdiction. When permitted, install valve chained and locked in OPEN position.

L. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.

M. Install faucet, laminar-flow fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts

when faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required.

N. Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on

indirect wastes, except where otherwise indicated.

O. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.



P. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, 1-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant according to sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Match sealant color to fixture color.

Q. Provide on all lavatories and sinks where hot water supplies a faucet a Symmons Series 7

Maxline, thermostatic mixing valve. Mixing valve shall supply tempered water to the hot water inlet side of each faucet. Set outlet temperature at 105 degrees Fahrenheit. Similar valves by Watts shall be acceptable.

R. Set high limit temperature on all shower valves to 105 degrees Fahrenheit.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing

equipment specified in other Division 22 Sections.

B. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this Section for fitting sizes and connection requirements for each plumbing fixture.

C. Supply and Waste Connections to Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect

equipment with supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and traps specified in this Section. Use fitting sizes required to match connected equipment. Connect fittings to plumbing piping.

D. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized and demonstrate proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Operate and adjust disposers, hot-water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning units and controls.

C. Adjust water pressure at Flushometer valves having controls, to produce proper flow and



stream.

D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

E. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Include the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall

strainers and spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by Owner.

PART 4 - PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. SINKS

S-35 Countertop Sink - Double Bowl

Elkay LR-3319 double bowl sink Chicago Faucet 786-E1-FC faucet (2) Elkay LK-35 duo strainer Elkay LK-53 continuous waste outlet Chicago Faucet 1006 loose key stops and risers McGuire 8912 P-Trap

S-36 Countertop Sink - Double Bowl - Disposer

Elkay LR-3319 double bowl sink Chicago Faucet 786-E1-FC faucet Elkay LK-35 duo strainer Elkay LK-53 continuous waste outlet Chicago Faucet 1006 loose key stops and risers In-Sink-Erator model 77, 3/4hp disposer McGuire 8912 P-Trap

S-37 Countertop Sink - Double Bowl - Hot Water Dispenser

Elkay LR-3319 double bowl sink, 3 hole drilling offset to left side, add fourth hole on right side of sink for hot water dispenser. Chicago Faucet 786-E1-FC faucet (2) Elkay LK-35 duo strainer Elkay LK-53 continuous waste outlet Chicago Faucet 1006 loose key stops and risers McGuire 8912 P-Trap In-Sink-Erator H-770 hot water dispenser, mount dispenser on countertop to left of sink



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

Page - 1

SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Common electrical installation requirements. 5. Excavation and Backfill. 6. Fire Stopping. 7. Utility Service.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. Test Equipment Suitability and Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, "Suitability of Test Equipment" and "Test Instrument Calibration."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.



Page - 2

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed.

D. Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful interoperability.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Notwithstanding any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, form or type of construction by name, or make, or catalog number, such references shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competi-tion; and the Contractor in such cases may, at his option, use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgement of the Engineer, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified.

B. Any materials or products other than those specified shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval at least 10 days prior to the submission of bids. Materials and products so approved will be so stated by addendum.

C. No substitute equipment will be considered unless sufficient data is submitted with the request to allow adequate comparison with the specified equipment.

D. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any or all substitute equipment, if, in his opinion, said equipment is not of equal quality, capacity or like design. In all cases, the decision of the Engineer shall be final.

E. This Contractor, at his option, may submit any item of material or equipment in a separate letter listing volunteer alternatives. An add or deduct price shall be indicated for each volunteer alternate submitted. Sufficient data shall accompany each volunteer alternate submitted to allow adequate comparison with the specified equipment. The Contractor shall pay all costs associated with reviewing proposed substitute material or equipment.

F. This Contractor shall pay all costs arising from the use of substitute equipment or material. Such costs shall include but shall not be limited to architectural design costs, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, fire protection, civil & structural engineering costs & cost to other trades to accommodate the substitute equipment

1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. This Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's review a list of all equipment and subcontractors he proposes to use. This list shall be submitted within thirty (30) days after signing of contracts or receiving "Letter of Intent". The engineer will review and comment on this list prior to submission of shop drawings.

B. After the Contractor has received the comments from the engineer concerning the list of equipment and subcontractors, this Contractor shall submit 8 copies of complete shop drawings or manufacturer data sheets, certification and descriptive literature for ALL material and equipment furnished on this project

C. Shop drawings, manufacturer data sheets and descriptive literature shall include parts lists, operating and maintenance manuals, etc.



Page - 3

D. The Contractor shall review each shop drawing etc. before submitting to the engineer to determine that it is acceptable in terms of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and operations of construction, safety precautions and programs incidental there to, all of which are the contractor's responsibility.

E. The engineer shall review each shop drawing, etc. for its conformity with design intent and compliance with information given in the construction documents.

F. The Contractor shall bring to the engineers attention any shop drawing, etc. that varies from the contract documents requirements.

G. The Contractor shall pay for the review of all shop drawings, etc. that varies from the requirements of the contract documents.

H. Shop drawings, etc. submitted for equipment or material which was not specified, included in the specification or drawings by written addendum, or submitted by separate letter with the contractors bid will be returned without review and will not be considered for this project.

I. At the completion of the project, this Contractor shall give the Owner three copies of all shop drawings, data sheets, operating manuals, parts lists, maintenance manuals, etc. which shall be bound in vinyl-covered three-ring binders with a complete index and index tabs. All manuals to be submitted to the Engineer's Office for review and acceptance prior to transmittal to the Owner.

1.9 OWNERS RECORD SET OF DRAWINGS

A. This Contractor shall keep a careful record of all changes in location of all electrical items on all floors from that actually shown on the working drawings. Upon completion of this project, this Contractor shall transmit these changes to a set of “As-Built” record set of drawings. The set of drawings shall include all drawings, even if no changes were made. Each "record drawing" shall be so labeled, dated and signed by this Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch (1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping.



Page - 4

2.3 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating or stainless

steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping.

C. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

D. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

E. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).



Page - 5

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

F. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

G. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

H. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

I. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require a different clearance.

J. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

K. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

L. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials.

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.

3.5 UTILITY COMPANY SERVICE

A. Install equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company.



Page - 6

3.6 EXCAVATION

A. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace as required for stability of excavation.

B. Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open.

1. Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is allowed to remain, cut top of sheeting at an elevation of 30 inches below finished grade elevation.

C. Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and ordinances.

D. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey surface water to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.

E. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.

1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip-line of trees indicated to remain.

2. Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill.

F. Trenching: Excavate trenches for electrical installations as follows:

1. Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches clearance on both sides of raceways and equipment.

2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. 3. Limit the length of open trench to that in which installations can be made and the trench

backfilled within the same day. 4. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill with a

layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of raceways and equipment. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone or gravel cushion between rock bearing surface and electrical installations.

G. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 deg F (1 deg 2 C).

H. Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations for each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section.

1. Under walks and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and excavated or borrowed materials.

2. Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials.



Page - 7

3. Under piping and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation.

4. For raceways less than 30 inches below surface of roadways, provide 4-inch-thick concrete base slab support. After installation of raceways, provide a 4-inch thick concrete encasement (sides and top) prior to backfilling and placement of roadway subbase.

5. Other areas, use excavated or borrowed materials.

I. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:

1. Inspection, testing, approval, and locations of underground utilities have been recorded. 2. Removal of concrete formwork. 3. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids. 4. Removal of trash and debris.

J. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

K. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification specified below. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

L. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, and equipment to required elevations. Prevent displacement of raceways and equipment by carrying material uniformly around them to approximately same elevation in each lift.

M. Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below.

1. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesionless soils).

a. Areas under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material.

b. Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material.

c. Other Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90 percent relative density for cohesionless soils.

2. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned

before compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to, compaction operations.



Page - 8

N. Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at electrical installation excavations during the period 12 months after Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent areas.


A. Inspect installed sleeve and sleeve-seal installations and associated firestopping for damage and faulty work.



LOW-VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page -1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.


1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and data circuits.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.




A. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


1. General Cable Corporation. 2. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 3. Southwire Company.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN.

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or type MC cable.



D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or type MC cable.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or type MC cable.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

H. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

I. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.



3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.



GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.




A. Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Ground rods

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.



4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Compression Connectors: Irreversible hydraulic compression kits as recommended by manufacturer. Connectors shall be factory filled with an oxide inhibitor.

E. Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression -type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch feet in diameter by 10 feet long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 30 inches below grade.

C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.



1. Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus.

D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment

grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater. Bond conductor to heater units.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.



1. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

2. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

3.4 LABELING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.

B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor where exposed.

1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Compression connections should be inspected for proper die index number per manufacturer specification.



4. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.

E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.


1. Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.


A. Product Data: For the following:



1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.



3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.



7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.



4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface raceways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 6. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.


1. Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

2. Division 27 Section "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving communications systems.

3. Division 28 Section "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.




A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

C. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Electri-Flex Company. 4. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 5. Republic Conduit. 6. Southwire Company. 7. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 8. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 9. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.



H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

I. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. Kraloy. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11. RACO; a Hubbell company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

D. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

E. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.

F. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS




1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Flanged-and-gasketed type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Mono-Systems, Inc. b. Panduit Corp. c. Wiremold / Legrand.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 6. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 7. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 8. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 9. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Wiremold / Legrand.



B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

G. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb.

1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

H. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

I. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

J. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

K. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

L. Gangable boxes are allowed.

M. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

N. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:



1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation; Hubbell Power Systems. d. NewBasis. e. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.; Christy Concrete Products. f. Synertech Moulded Products; a division of Oldcastle Precast, Inc.

2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC”. 7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks

and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.



4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. EMT: Use setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.



G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. A. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

R. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:



1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

V. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

AA. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.



BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

DD. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of

conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct-buried conduits but a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit.

7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.



D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.



IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page - 1

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.



B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.4 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.



B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE,. 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE, etc.

2.5 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

3. Electrical Panel Arc Flash: “WARNING – ARC FLASH AND SHOCK HAZARD – APPROPRIATE PPE AND TOOLS REQUIRED WHEN WORKING ON THIS EQUIPMENT.”

2.6 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.



2.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

B. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

2.8 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.



C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

G. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.

H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Power.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:.

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

b. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.



1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

E. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

F. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

G. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Controls with external control power connections.

H. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

I. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, Stenciled legend 4 inches high.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:



a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchboards. e. Enclosed controllers. f. Variable-speed controllers. g. Push-button stations.



PANELBOARDS Page - 1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. SPD: Surge Protective Device.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, surge protective device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

PANELBOARDS 262416 -2 of 8

8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:




B. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:

Two spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and

type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each

size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.




A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.

1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E.


1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344.

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.

4. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.

5. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.



E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker or main lugs only.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 5. .

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.


C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES



B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

4. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

5. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

f. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit breaker trips.

g. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

h. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.

i. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.

Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

I. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.



WIRING DEVICES Page - 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Weather-resistant receptacles. 3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 4. Solid-state fan speed controls. 5. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.




A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).



2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass & Seymour; 2095. d. Leviton; 7590.

2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Single Pole:

1) Cooper; AH1221. 2) Hubbell; HBL1221. 3) Leviton; 1221-2. 4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

b. Two Pole:


c. Three Way:


d. Four Way:

1) Cooper; AH1224. 2) Hubbell; HBL1224. 3) Leviton; 1224-2.



4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4.

C. Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V. c. Leviton; 1221-LH1. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V. e.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."

2.6 RESIDENTIAL DEVICES

A. Fan Speed Controls:

1. Modular, 120-V, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters.

2. Comply with UL 1917. 3. Continuously adjustable slider, 5 A.

2.7 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

2.8 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant thermoplastic with lockable cover.

2.9 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White or as selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.



B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.



E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout

or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.



C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.



ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.



B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




C. Field quality-control reports.

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

D. Manufacturer's field service report.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

5. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES





B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

4. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.



INTERIOR LIGHTING Page - 1

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for fluorescent lamps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast, including BF.



4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with

IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Installation instructions.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the

plane of the luminaires. 4. Ceiling-mounted projectors. 5. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 6. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke and fire detectors. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Access panels.

7. Perimeter moldings.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Fluorescent-fixture-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 50 emergency lighting unit.

4. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

5. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.



1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.

2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

C. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.

D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

E. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

G. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

H. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.



b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

I. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.

2.3 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.



5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is

restored after an outage. 8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.5 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage.

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.

2. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.



3. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

D. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to

building structure.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.


City of Brentwood Fire House ADA Upgrades

Documents

Transcript of City of Brentwood Fire House ADA Upgrades